Menu

Revelation 15:6 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ οἳ ἦσαν ἐνδεδυμένοι λίνον καθαρὸν καὶ λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

BSAAndkai came forthexerchomai theho [from within, originating from] sevenhepta angelsangelos [heavenly messengers, divine agents] thoseho havingechō theho sevenhepta [complete, perfect] plaguesplēgē [blows, wounds, or judgments] outek of theho templenaos [a sacred place of worship, the inner sanctuary] whohos, hē wereeimi having clothed themselves inenduō [clothed with, arrayed in] linenlinon [fine, white fabric] purekatharos [pure, undefiled] and brightlampros [shining, radiant] andkai having girded themselves withperizōnnumi [fastened, bound] aroundperi theho chestsstēthos [breasts, the front of the body] sasheszōnē [belts, girdles] golden.chruseos [valuable, precious]

Word
Listen & take awayRevelation 15
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 6 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (chruseos) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Revelation 15:6quick helps
In a sentenceThe seven angels emerge from the temple, bringing plagues and dressed in radiant linen.
Who is speakingThe narrator of the vision, likely John, describes the angels' appearance and their origin.
Where we areIn the heavenly temple, a setting that emphasizes the divine authority of the angels.
The hard wordἐξῆλθον
Take awayThe angels are prepared for their task, symbolizing God's judgment.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbἐξέρχομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Revelation 15:6

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Seven Angels and the Plaguesgenerated

5After this I looked, and the temple—the tabernacle of the Testimony—was opened in heaven.
6And out of the temple came the seven angels with the seven plagues, dressed in clean and bright linen and girded with golden sashes around their chests.
7Then one of the four living creatures gave the seven angels seven golden bowls full of the wrath of God, who lives forever and ever.
8And the temple was filled with smoke from the glory of God and from His power; and no one could enter the temple until the seven plagues of the seven angels were completed.

Revelation 15:6 describes the moment when seven angels come out of the temple, ready to deliver God's plagues. This scene follows the opening of the heavenly temple in Revelation 15:5 and sets the stage for the final judgments described in the Book of Revelation. The imagery of angels dressed in clean linen signifies their purity and divine mission, reflecting the seriousness of the plagues they are about to unleash, which are further detailed in Revelation 16:1.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Revelation 15:1Then I saw another great and marvelous sign in heaven: seven angels with the seven final plagues, with which the wrath of God is completed.
2Revelation 1:13and among the lampstands was One like the Son of Man, dressed in a long robe, with a golden sash around His chest.
3Exodus 28:5–8They shall use gold, along with blue, purple, and scarlet yarn, and fine linen.
4Ezekiel 44:17–18When they enter the gates of the inner court, they are to wear linen garments; they must not wear anything made of wool when they minister at the gates of the inner court or inside the temple.
5Luke 24:4While they were puzzling over this, suddenly two men in radiant apparel stood beside them.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 5 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

the seven angelsRevelation 15:1

The Key Word ἐξῆλθον, exerchomaigenerated

The verb ἐξέρχομαι, transliterated as exerchomai, means 'to come out' or 'to go out of.' It is a second aorist active indicative verb, indicating a completed action in the past. This word emphasizes the angels' emergence from the temple, signifying their readiness to enact God's will.

In this context, the verb highlights the transition from the divine realm of the temple to the earthly realm where the plagues will be executed. The action of coming forth carries a sense of urgency and purpose, as these angels are sent to fulfill God's judgment.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered similarly across several translations, with the Berean Standard Bible (BSB) stating, 'And out of the temple came the seven angels with the seven plagues.' The KJV and ASV also convey this idea, though with slight variations in wording.

Where translations differ is in the rendering of specific terms. For example, ἄγγελοι is consistently translated as 'angels' in most versions, while ἔχοντες varies between 'having' and 'had.' Additionally, καθαρὸν is translated as 'pure' in several versions, but as 'clean' in others.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the sentence is ἐξῆλθον, came forth, which governs the entire clause. The sentence includes several phrases that describe the angels and their attire, indicating their divine purpose and authority.

The structure features a noun phrase as the subject, οἱ ἄγγελοι, the angels, followed by a participial phrase ἔχοντες, having, which provides additional information about the angels and their plagues.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἐξέρχομαι appears in the Septuagint, often translating the Hebrew word יָצָא, which means 'to go out' or 'to come out.' This connection emphasizes the continuity of God's actions from the Old Testament to the New Testament.

The term ναός, meaning 'temple,' is also found in the Septuagint, where it refers to the sacred dwelling place of God, reinforcing the significance of the angels' emergence from this holy space.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Revelation 15:6 describes how seven angels came out of the temple, bringing with them seven plagues. They were dressed in clean and bright linen and wore golden sashes around their chests. This imagery highlights their purity and the seriousness of their mission, as they prepare to execute God's judgments.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What is the significance of the angels' attire?

The angels are dressed in clean and bright linen, symbolizing their purity and holiness as they carry out God's judgment.

Why are there seven angels?

The number seven often symbolizes completeness or perfection in the Bible, indicating that these angels represent the fullness of God's judgment.

What do the plagues represent?

The plagues represent God's judgment upon the earth, similar to the plagues of Egypt, and serve as a warning to humanity.

How does this passage connect to the overall message of Revelation?

This passage emphasizes God's sovereignty and the seriousness of His judgments, which are central themes throughout the Book of Revelation.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What does the imagery of the angels in clean linen teach us about God's holiness?
  2. How can we understand the significance of the number seven in the context of God's judgments?
  3. In what ways do the plagues serve as a warning to humanity in our current context?
  4. How can we prepare ourselves spiritually as we reflect on the seriousness of God's judgments?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church commentators reflect on the significance of the seven angels and their mission, drawing from this passage to illustrate God's judgment.

OecumeniusCommentary on Revelation 6th c.
From there, the seven angels, he says, came out. For where else should the heavenly ministers of God be seen as coming forth but from the heavenly temple? And he says they had in their hands seven plagues which they would pour out upon the…
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 15 →
BedeCommentary on Revelation c. 673–735
And the seven angels came out, having the seven plagues from the temple. This is what Mark says: But they went out and preached everywhere.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 15 →
BedeCommentary on Revelation c. 673–735
Clothed in pure bright linen. As many (the Apostle says) as were baptized into Christ have put on Christ (Gal. III). For He is the supreme cornerstone chosen.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 15 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Revelation 15:6 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And the seven angels came out of the temple,.... By which it appears, that they are such who are of, or belong to the church of Christ; and are either ministers, or members of churches, who will be

Read John Gill on Revelation 15 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And the seven angels came out of the temple, having the seven plagues, clothed in pure and white linen, and having their breasts girded with golden girdles. Having.

Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 15 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

And the seven angels; the seven ministers of God’ s vengeance on antichrist, to whom the vials were given. Came out of the temple; that is, out of the tabernacle of the testimony; for in Moses’ s tabernacle there was only this inward court for the priests, the people worshipped without. They came (as the high priest was wont) out of the oracle to bring God’ s answer to all his saints’ prayers. Having the seven plagues: the answer was seven plagues, that is, that God had employed them to bring seven plagues successively upon the antichristian party, and all the enemies of his church, till by them they should be consumed. Clothed in pure and white linen, and having their breasts girded with…

Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 15 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

6 And the seven angels came out of the temple, having the seven plagues, clothed in pure and white linen, and having their breasts girded with golden girdles. Ver. 6. Clothed in pure] Habited as holy priests. With golden girdles] Here an interpreter gives this note, that they which are lewd and vicious, though never so wise, political, rich, and valiant, shall not be God’ s instruments to plague Antichrist and his kingdom. (Mr Bernard.) This their priestly apparel showeth also how that these angels come forth in the Church’ s cause, and for her sake, without any by and sinister respect. They are all of them sincere professors of the truth of Christ, their breasts girded with the golden…

Read John Trapp on Revelation 15 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(6) And the seven angels . . .—Better, And there came out the seven angels who had the seven plagues from the temple, clothed in linen, pure, glistening, and girt about their breasts with golden girdles. The temple is the inner shrine, or sanctuary; it was this which was measured (Revelation 11:1); it was out of this that the angel with the sharp sickle came for the vintage of the earth (Revelation 14:7); out of this now came the seven angels with the seven plagues. It is well to remember this, for these plagues are not, like the judgments of the trumpet, calls to repentance; they are plagues on those who have refused to return, who have rejected the sanctuary, the tabernacle of witness…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 15 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 6. The seven angels came out of the temple] To show that they were sent from God himself. Clothed in pure and white linen] Habited as priests. For these habits see Exodus 28:6; Exodus 28:8; and See Clarke on Revelation 1:13.

Read AdamClarke on Revelation 15 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

6. having] We should probably read “which had”: we see in Revelation 15:7 that they did not come out having them.white] More accurately, bright.linen] R. V. “arrayed with precious stone, pure and bright” following a strange reading “stone” (the Greek word differs only by one letter), which is very strongly attested. If it be right, the nearest parallel is Ezekiel 28:13—where, comparing the next two verses, it seems as though the human “king of Tyrus” were identified with a fallen Angel, perhaps the patron of the city. Therefore these holy Angels may be here described as clothed in glory like his before his fall.their breasts] As in Revelation 1:13, where see note.

Read Cambridge on Revelation 15 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And the seven angels - See the notes on Revelation 15:1. Came out of the temple - Were seen to come from the temple; that is, from the immediate presence of God. Having the seven plagues - See the notes on Revelation 15:1.

Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 15 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

And out of the temple came the seven angels with the seven plagues, dressed in clean and bright linen and girded with golden sashes around their chests.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

The seven angels who had the seven plagues came out, clothed with pure, bright linen, and wearing golden sashes around their chests.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

And out of the temple came the seven angels with the seven plagues, dressed in clean and bright linen and girded with golden sashes around their chests.

NETBNew English Translation2006

and the seven angels who had the seven plagues came out of the temple, dressed in clean bright linen, wearing wide golden belts around their chests.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And the seven angels came out of the temple, having the seven plagues, clothed in pure and white linen, and having their breasts girded with golden girdles.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

and there came out from the temple the seven angels that had the seven plagues, arrayed with precious stone, pure and bright, and girt about their breasts with golden girdles.

RVARevised Version, American1894

and there came out from the temple the seven angels that had the seven plagues, arrayed with precious stone, pure and bright, and girt about their breasts with golden girdles.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And the seven angels came out of the temple, having the seven plagues, clothed in pure and white linen, and having their breasts girded with golden girdles.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And the seuen Angels came out of the Temple, which had the seuen plagues, clothed in pure and bright linnen, and hauing their breasts girded with golden girdles.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

and the seven angels who had the seven plagues came out of the temple, clothed in pure bright linen, and girded about the breasts with golden girdles.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and come forth did the seven messengers having the seven plagues, out of the sanctuary, clothed in linen, pure and shining, and girded round the breasts with golden girdles:

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and the seven messengers having the seven plagues came forth out of the temple, clothed in linen, pure and radiant, and girded around the breasts with golden girdles:

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Out of the most holy place came the seven angels holding the seven plagues. They were clothed with pure, bright linen and had golden sashes around their chests.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And the seven angels came out of the temple, having the seven plagues, clothed with clean and white linen, and girt about the breasts with golden girdles.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Out of the Temple came the seven angels who held the seven plagues, wearing clean, white linen clothes and golden sashes on their chests.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And the seven angels who had the seven punishments came out from the house of God, clothed with linen, clean and bright and with bands of gold about their breasts.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἄγγελοιangelos angels G32 2 different renderings
angelsASV BBE BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
messengersLSV YLT
ἔχοντεςechō having G2192 3 different renderings
hadASV BBE DBY GNV NETB RVA WEB
havingDRA KJV LSV NWB YLT
holdingULB
καθαρὸνkatharos pure G2513 2 different renderings
pureASV DBY GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
cleanBBE BSB DRA FBV MSB NETB
λαμπρὸνlampros bright G2986 3 different renderings
brightASV BBE BSB DBY GNV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB
shiningYLT
radiantLSV
στήθηstēthos chests G4738 2 different renderings
breastsASV BBE DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA YLT
chestsBSB FBV MSB NETB ULB WEB
ζώναςzōnē sashes G2223 3 different renderings
girdlesASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA YLT
sashesBSB FBV MSB ULB WEB
beltsNETB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseΚαὶAndclauseclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialμετὰafterταῦταthese thingsverbεἶδονI lookedκαὶandclauseclauseverbἠνοίγηwas openednoun phrase · subjectthenoun phrasenoun phraseναὸςtemplenoun phraseτῆςof thenoun phraseσκηνῆςtabernaclenoun phraseτοῦof theμαρτυρίουtestimonyprepositional phraseἐνinnoun phraseτῷ-οὐρανῷheavenκαὶAndclauseverbἐξῆλθονcame forthnoun phrase · subjectnoun phraseοἱthenoun phraseἑπτὰsevenἄγγελοιangelsnoun phraseοἱ-clauseverbἔχοντεςhavingnoun phrase · objectτὰςthenoun phraseἑπτὰsevenπληγὰςplaguesprepositional phrase · adverbialἐκoutnoun phraseτοῦof theναοῦtempleclause · adverbialclauseverbἐνδεδυμένοιhaving been clothed innoun phrase · objectnoun phraseλίνονlinenκαθαρὸνpureλαμπρὸνbrightκαὶandclauseverbπεριεζωσμένοιhaving been girded withprepositional phrase · adverbialπερὶaroundnoun phraseτὰtheστήθηchestsnoun phrase · objectζώναςsashesχρυσᾶςgolden

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

et exierunt septem angeli habentes septem plagas de templo, vestiti lino mundo et candido, et præcincti circa pectora zonis aureis.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܢܦܩܘ ܫܒܥܐ ܡܠܐܟܝܢ ܡܢ ܗܝܟܠܐ ܗܢܘܢ ܕܐܝܬ ܥܠܝܗܘܢ ܫܒܥ ܡܚܘܢ ܟܕ ܠܒܝܫܝܢ ܟܬܢܐ ܕܟܝܐ ܘܢܗܝܪܐ ܘܐܣܝܪܝܢ ܥܠ ܚܕܝܝܗܘܢ ܐܣܪܐ ܕܕܗܒܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐνδεδυμένοι λίνον καθαρὸν λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐνδεδυμένοι λίνον καθαρὸν λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐνδεδυμένοι λίνον καθαρὸν λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐνδεδυμένοι καθαρὸν λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐνδεδυμένοι καθαρὸν λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐνδεδυμένοι λίνον καθαρὸν λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ οἳ ἦσαν ἐνδεδυμένοι λίνον καθαρὸν λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἑπτὰ ἄγγελοι ἔχοντες τὰς ἑπτὰ πληγὰς ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐνδεδυμένοι λίνον καθαρὸν καὶ λαμπρὸν καὶ περιεζωσμένοι περὶ τὰ στήθη ζώνας χρυσᾶς.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
οἱ thoseNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, ByzTR
οἳ whoByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR
ἦσαν wereByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR
λίνον linenNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, TR, ByzWH, Treg
καὶ andTRNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, Byz

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Revelation 15:6καίAndAndκαίἐξέρχομαιcame forthcame forthἐξέρχομαιthetheἑπτάsevensevenἑπτάἄγγελοςangelsangelsἄγγελοςthosethoseἔχωhavinghavingἔχωthetheἑπτάsevensevenἑπτάπληγήplaguesplaguesπληγήἐκoutoutἐκof theof theναόςtempletempleναόςὅςwhowhoὅςεἰμίwerewereεἰμίἐνδύωhaving clothaving clothed ἐνδύωλίνονlinenlinenλίνονκαθαρόςpurepureκαθαρόςκαίandandκαίλαμπρόςbrightbrightλαμπρόςκαίandandκαίπεριζώννυμιhaving girdhaving girded tπεριζώννυμιπερίaroundaroundπερίthetheστῆθοςchestschestsστῆθοςζώνηsashessashesζώνηχρυσοῦςgolden.golden.χρυσοῦςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκἄγωv. I leadv. I leadἄγωπλήσσωv. I strikv. I strike, smπλήσσωἐνPrep. in, Prep. in, on, aἐνπερίPrep. abouPrep. about, coπερίἵστημιv. I causev. I cause to sἵστημιχρυσόςn.m. anythn.m. anything mχρυσόςἱερόςn.n. a temn.n. a templeἱερόςArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗλαμπάςn.f. a torn.f. a torch, lλαμπάςπέρανAdv over, Adv over, beyonπέρανζυγόςn.m. a yokn.m. a yoke, heζυγόςπληγήn.f. a blon.f. a blow, stπληγήἀστήρn.m. a stan.m. a starἀστήρἑπτάIndec.num.Indec.num. seveἑπτάἐπαύριονAdv tomorrAdv tomorrowἐπαύριονἐκεῖθενAdv thenceAdv thence, froἐκεῖθεν
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Revelation 15:6

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἐξῆλθονexerchomai came forth G1831 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
217× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To go out or come out of a place, as in Matthew 10:11 and Mark 1:35, where Jesus and his disciples went out to preach. This word is also used in John 13:30, where Judas went out into the night. It can also mean to spread out or proceed from a place.
Tyndale gloss
to go out
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐξέρχομαι, transliterated as exerchomai, is built from the prefix ἐξ meaning 'out of' and the root ἔρχομαι meaning 'to come' or 'to go.' It generally means to go or come out of a place, and can also refer to escaping, departing, or proceeding. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including the expulsion of demons and the release of prisoners.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐξ-έρχομαι,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for יצא, also for עלה ,בֹּוא, etc. ;]

depon.,

to go, or come out of: Mt 10:11, Mk 1:35, Jo 13:30, al.; c. inf., Mt 11:8, Mk 3:21, Lk 7:25, 26 Ac 20:8; id. seq. ἐπί, Mt 26:55, al.; εἰς, Mk 1:38; ἵνα, Re 6:2; ἐ. seq. ἐκ (cl. c. gen. loc.), Mk 5:2, Jo 4:30, al.; ἔξω, c. gen.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐξέρχομαι ; impf. eEnpyounv; fut. ἐξελεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἐξῆλθον, plur. 2 pers. ἐξήλθετε, 3 pers. ἐξῆλθον, and in LT Tr WH the Atex. forms (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ἐξήλGare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, ete.), ἐξῆλθαν (1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Ao0v; 3 Jn. 7, ete.]); pe. ἐξελήλυθα;: plpf. ἐξεληλύθειν (Lk. viii. 38, ete.) ; Sept. for N¥? times without number ; to go or come out of; 1. properly; a. with mention of the place out of which one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of those who leave a place of their own accord: with the gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (1, Τ Tr WH insert ἔξω) ; Acts xvi. 39RG. foll. by ἐκ : Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii. 59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, ete. foll. by ἔξω with gen. — with addition of εἰς and ace. of place, Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or παρά with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 13; or πρός twa, ace. of pers., Heb. xiii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐξέρχομαι. For this verb in its ordinary sense it is sufficient to cite P Oxy II. 282" (a complaint against a wife—a.D. 30-35) kata πέρ[α]ς ἐξῆλθε] kal ἀπηνέκαντο (/. —éyKavto) τὰ ἡμέτερα, ‘finally she left the house and they carried off my belongings,” 26. III. 472! (c. A.D. 130) ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκείνου οἰκίας ἐξεληλύθει, 25. 5287 (ii/a.D.) ἀφ᾽ ὡς ἐκξῆλθες (1. €E—) ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ πένθος ἡγούμην, ‘‘ever since you Jeft me I have been in mourning” (Edd.): cf. for the constr. with ἀπό, Lk 55. P Oxy I. 1128 (iii/iv A.D.) δήλωσόν por ἢ πλοίῳ éépx [et] ἢ ὄνῳ shows the verb followed by the instrumental dat.: cf. Jn 21%. For ἐξέρχομαι of the driving forth of demons, as in Mk 178 a/., cf. the magical P Par 5741248 (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 114) ἔξελθε, Satpov,. . . Kal ἀπόστηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ 8(e)i(va), and for the verb followed by ἔπί cf. P Tebt 11. 283° (B.c. 93 or 60) ἐξελήλυθεν ἐπὶ τὴν + + μητέρα pov, “‘made…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐξέρχομαι (exerchomai) — to go out.

ἐξέρχομαι,

future -ελεύσομαι (but in Attic dialect ἔξειμι (A) supplies the future, also imperfect ἐξῄειν): aorist 2 ἐξῆλθον, the only tense used in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— go or come out of, with genitive loci, τείχεος, πυλάων, πόληος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐ. δωμάτων, χθονός, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of an actor, come out on the stage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, come forth, ἐ. καὶ ἀμῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b rarely with accusative, ἐξῆλθον τὴν Περσίδα χώραν [LXX+5th c.BC+]

__c absolutely, march out, go forth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__d of an accused person, withdraw from the country to avoid trial, opposed to φεύγω, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐξέρχομαι

exerchomai

from 1537 and 2064; to issue (literally or figuratively):--come

(forth, out), depart (out of), escape, get out, go (abroad, away,

forth, out, thence), proceed (forth), spread abroad.

see GREEK for 1537

see GREEK for 2064

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐξέρχομαι

v.

I go out, come out

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐξέρχομαι exerchomai 218x

to go or come out of; to come out, Mt. 5:26; 8:34; to proceed, emanate, take rise from, Mt. 2:6; 15:18; 1 Cor. 14:36; to come abroad, 1 Jn. 4:1; to go forth, go away, depart, Mt. 9:31; Lk. 5:8; to escape, Jn. 10:39; to pass away, come to an end, Acts 16:19

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐξέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι in attic ἔξειμι supplies the fut., as also the imperf. ἐξῄειν aor2 ἐξῆλθον Dep.:— to go or come out of, c. gen. loci, Hom., Hdt., etc.; of an actor, to come out on the stage, Ar.:—also c. acc., ἐξ. τὴν χώρην Hdt.:—absol. to go away, march off, Il.: also, to march out, go forth, ἐπί τινα Hdt.:—c. acc. cogn. to go out on an expedition, Xen.: to go through a work, Soph.

ἐξ. εἰς ἔλεγχον to stand forth and come to the trial, Eur.: to turn out so and so, Soph.

c. acc. rei, to execute, Thuc.

of Time, to come to an end, expire, Hdt., Soph.

of prophecies, dreams, events, to be accomplished, come true, Hdt.; ὀρθὸν ἐξ. to come out right, Soph.; μὴ ἐξέλθῃ σαφής lest he turn out a true prophet, id. Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3P — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

forth: "Forth," adverb (from "for"), signifies movement

(1) forward,

(2) out of,

(3) beyond a certain boundary.

In a few instances in the Old Testament it is the translation of the preposition `al, properly "above," "upon" (2Ki 11:15; 2Ch 23:14; Am 7:17 the King James Version), and of chuts, "without" (Ge 39:13; Jud 19:25). "Forth" is often used as an expletive of various verbs, as "break (forth)," "bring (forth)," "call (forth)," etc. In the Gospel of John it is the translation of exo, "without," as "Lazarus, come forth" (11:43; so 15:6; 19:4 the King James Version…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
12%having gone out
having gone out12% · 27×went out11% · 24×having gone forth6% · 13×he went forth5% · 11×he went out3% · 7×went forth3% · 7×came forth3% · 6×going out2% · 5×other renderings55% · 120×

220 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 85 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb87%adverbial12%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 217 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςφιμόωI muzzle, silencεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
αὐτός
παράκαταλείπωI leave behind, γάρfor
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theαὐτόςπάλινagain, further,
σύ
δέχομαιI take, receive,λόγοςa word, speech, ἐπιτάσσωI give order, co
τίςIrg
ἀλλάbut, exceptἸωάννηςJohn
ἐξέρχομαιcame forth217×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusσπείρωI sow, spread, sΦαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
ἐκ
Article theαὐτόςμέσοςmiddle, in the m
εἰς
Article theὑπάντησιςa meetingΜακεδονίαMacedonia
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔρχομαιI come, goἀπέρχομαιI come or go awaγίνομαιI come into bein
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theεἰςεὑρίσκωI find

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐξέρχομαι · 217× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Mark John Acts Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 John 1 Thessalonians 2 John

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 332 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.59c. AD 40

"ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.8c. AD 100

νῦν δὲ ὅ λέγει: τὰ φύλλα οὐκ ἀπορυήσεται, τοῦτο λέγει: ὅτι πᾶν ῥῆμα, ὃ ἐὰν ἐξελεύσεται ἐξ ὑμῶν διὰ τοῦ στόματος ὑμῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ, ἔσται εἰς ἐπιστροφὴν καὶ ἐλπίδα πολλοῖς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
O.Claud. 4 876Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

Σωκράτης Ἀθηνοδώρῳ καὶ Ἀμμωνίῳ ἀμφοτέροις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐξελθόντες εἰς Τιβεριανὴν στομώσαντες τὰ σιδήρια τῶν σκληρουργῶν. ἄχρηστα γὰρ πάντα τὰ σιδήρια ἅπαξ ἵνα

O.Claud. 4 877Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

τιμιωτάτοις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐπεὶ οἱ σκληρουργοὶ λέγουσίν μοι ὅτι οὐχ εἰσερχόμεθα ἔσω στομῶντες ἐξελθόντες στομώσατε. καὶ γράφετε ἡμᾶς ἀργεῖν. ἐκ δύο τὸ … ἓν δρᾶ, ἵνα στομώσητε ἢ

O.Claud. 4 887Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

σφῆνας εὐχαριστοῦμεν αὐτοῖς. βέβληται καὶ ἐπιβεβλήμεθα … τὴν πλάκα. εἰ οὖν θέλεις ἵνα ἀπαρτισθῇ, ἔξελθε στομώσειν αὐτοῖς καὶ ἆρον αὐτῶν τὴν πρόφασιν μετὰ δύο σφυροκόπων Μα … Μωνισπος

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Amplified meaning
from within, originating from
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἑπτὰhepta seven G2033 Adjective · nominative
88× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for the number seven, used in the Bible to describe completeness or perfection, as seen in Matthew 12:45 and Mark 8:5.
Tyndale gloss
seven
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἑπτά (i.e., *hepta*) means 'seven' and is an indeclinable numeral. It appears in various New Testament passages, including Matthew and Acts. The entries note its use as a mystical number and in references to specific groups or concepts, but there is no significant disagreement among the lexicons.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά

indecl.,

seven: Mt 12:45 18:22 (cf. ἑβδομηκοντάκις), Mk 8:5, al.; οἱ ἐ, Ac 21:8

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἑπτά. As we have no fresh light from our sources, it lies outside our sphere to discuss the uses of this number in the NT, but reference may be made to the notes by Allen on Mk 16%, and by Moffatt (in ΞΟ 7) on Rev 51. Note also Ac 1219 Ὁ κατέβησαν τοὺς { βαθμούς and Ey. Petr. 8 ἐπέχρισαν ἑπτὰ σφραγῖδας. MGr ἑφτά shows the aspirate in compensation for the loss (in pronunciation) of the rough breathing.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἑπτά (hepta) — seven.

ἑπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά,

indeclinable seven, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; as a mystical number, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; αἱ ἑ. νῆσοι the seven largest islands, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὰ ἑ. θεάματα the [Refs 1st c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. σοφισταί the [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. alone, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

2. οἱ ἑ., board of magistrates at Olbia, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. ἄνδρες, = Latin septemviri epulones, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sept[macutenull], cf. Sanskrit saptá, Latin septem (fancifully connected with σέβομαι, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἑπτά

hepta

a primary number; seven:--seven.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἑπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά

Indec.num.

seven

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἑπτά hepta 88x

seven, indecl. numeral, Mt. 15:34, 37; by Jewish usage for a round number, Mt. 12:45; Lk. 11:26

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἑπτά seven, Lat. septem, Hom., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sev'-'-n (shebha`; hepta).

See NUMBER.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Seven

This number occurs frequently in Scripture, and in such connections as lead to the supposition that it has some typical meaning. On the seventh day God rested, and hallowed it (Gen. 2:2, 3). The division of time into weeks of seven days each accounts for many instances of the occurrence of this number. This number has been called the symbol of perfection, and also the symbol of rest. “Jacob’s seven years’ service to Laban; Pharaoh’s seven fat oxen and seven lean ones; the seven branches of the golden candlestick; the seven trumpets and the seven priests who sounded them; the seven days’ siege of Jericho; the seven churches, seven spirits, seven stars, seven seals, seven vials, and many others, sufficiently prove the importance of this sacred number” (see Lev. 25:4;

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The frequent recurrence of certain numbers in the sacred literature of the Hebrews is obvious to the most superficial reader, but seven so far surpasses the rest, both in the frequency with which it recurs and in the importance of the objects with which it is associated, that it may fairly be termed the representative symbolic number. The influence of the number seven was not restricted to the Hebrews; it prevailed among the Persians, ancient Indians, Greeks and Romans. The peculiarity of the Hebrew view consists in the special dignity of the seventh, and not simply in that of seen. The Sabbath being the seventh day suggested the adoption of seven as the coefficient, so to say, for their appointment of all sacred periods; and we thus find the 7th month ushered in by the Feast of Trumpets, and signalized by the celebration of the Feast of Tabernacles and the Great Day of Atonement; 7…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

As from the beginning this was the number of days in the week, so it often has in Scripture a sort of emphasis attached to it, and is very generally used as a round or perfect number. Clean beasts were taken into the ark by sevens, Ge 7:1-24. The years of plenty and famine in Egypt were marked by sevens, Ge 41:1-57. With the Jews, not only was there a seventh day Sabbath, but every seventh year was a Sabbath, and after every seven times seven years came a jubilee. Their great feasts of unleavened bread and of tabernacles were observed for seven days; the number of animals in many of their sacrifices was limited to seven. The golden candlestick had seven branches. Seven priests with seven trumpets went around the walls of Jericho seven days, and seven times on the seventh day. In…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
98%seven
seven98% · 86×other renderings2% · 2×

88 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object41%subject31%adverbial11%predicate10%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 88 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἔχωI have, hold, poἐκ
κεφαλήthe head
ἔχωI have, hold, poκαίand, even, also,ἑπτάIndec
λέγωI say, speak
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,
ἡμέραa day
διατρίβωI tarry, continuαὐτοῦhere, thereἐπιμένωI remain, tarry,
ἑαυτοῦ
μετάπονηρόςevil, bad, wicke
ἑπτάseven88×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
κέραςa hornὀλίγος& AdvεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenger
Article theὅςἑπτάIndec
ἐκκλησίαan assembly, congreg
εἰμίI am, existArticle theεἰς
πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit
Article theὅς
ἀστήρa star
ὅςἄγγελοςan angel, messenἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἑπτά · 88× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Mark Acts Luke Hebrews
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 189 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 91c. AD 40

διχῶς ἑβδομὰς λέγεται, ἡ μὲν ἐντὸς δεκάδος, ἥτις ἑπτάκις μονάδι μόνῃ μετρεῖται συνεστῶσα ἐκ μονάδων ἑπτά, ἡ δ’ ἐκτὸς δεκάδος, ἀριθμὸς οὗ πάντως ἀρχὴ μονὰς κατὰ τοὺς διπλασίους ἢ τριπλασίους ἢ συνόλως ἀναλογοῦντας ἀριθμούς, ὡς ἔχει ὁ ἑξηκοντατέσσαρα…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.63c. AD 75–95

Ἀνώχου δὲ Ἰαράδης υἱὸς ἦν, ἐκ δὲ τούτου Μαρουῆλος, οὗ γίνεται παῖς Μαθουσάλας, τοῦ δὲ Λάμεχος, ᾧ παῖδες ὑπῆρξαν ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ἐκ δύο γυναικῶν αὐτῷ φύντες Σελλᾶς καὶ Ἄδας.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.8.2c. AD 140

ἐμβλέψασά μοι ὑπεμειδίασεν καὶ λέγει μοι: Βλέπεις ἑπτὰ γυναῖκας κύκλῳ τοῦ πύργου;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Athen.. 23Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 82

ζ, ἐν Θεαδελφίαι τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοΐτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογοῦσιν Δῖος ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι ἑπτὰ οὐλὴ δακτύλῳ πρώτῳ χειρὸς ἀριστερᾶς καὶ Ὦσις ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι τεσσάρων οὐλὴ ποδὶ ἀριστερῶι

P.Alex. 7Dionysias (Arsinoites)AD 113

τέσσαρας καὶ τοὺς τόκους ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι τῷ Διοσκόρῳ ἐν μηνὶ Τῦβι τοῦ εἰσίοντος ἕπτα καὶ δεκάτου ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ μηδὲν ἐλαττουμένου τοῦ Διοσκόρου

P.Amh. 2 121ArsinoitesAD 160

Ἁθὺρ η. διέγραψε Σαβεῖνος Ζωσίμου ὑπὲρ ζυτηρᾶς κατʼ ἄνδρα τοῦ διεληλυθότος κγ ἔτους δραχμὰς ἑπτὰ τετρώβολον, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ζ τετρώβολον. κδ ἔτους Ἁθὺρ η. διέγραψε Σαβεῖνος Ζωσίμου γεωργὸς ιζ

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἄγγελοιangelos angels G32 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
176× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
An angel is a messenger, especially a heavenly being who serves as a messenger of God, as seen in Matthew 11:10 and Luke 1:11.
Amplified meaning
heavenly messengers, divine agents
Tyndale gloss
angel
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄγγελος (transliterated as aggelos) means 'messenger' and is often used to refer to a divine messenger or angel. It is derived from the verb ἀγγέλλω (to announce). In the New Testament, it encompasses both heavenly beings sent by God and human messengers, with interpretations varying regarding its use in specific contexts, such as in Revelation where it may refer to church leaders or guardian angels.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ;]

a messenger, one sent: Mt 11:10, Ja 22:25.

As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Lk 1:11, or to execute them, as Mt 4:6. The ἄ. in Re 1:20 2:1, al., is variously understood as

a messenger or delegate,

a bishop or ruler,

a guardian angel,

the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, s.v.; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, s.v.)

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vil. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. li. 25. [Fr. Hom. down. ] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk.i. 13; Lk. xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, ef. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (LK. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.; Acts x. 3; xxvii. 23; Mt. i. 20; ii. 13; xxviii. 5; Jn. xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ἄγγελος (angel, messenger of God, 3x90) and ἄγγελοι κυρίου or ayy. τοῦ θεοῦ. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, ef. Eph. i. 21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄγγελος. In Sy// 51271, a dialect inscr. of ii/B.c. from Calymna, ἄγγελοι are envoys whose names are given. The word is used in the sense of ‘‘intermediary” (cf. Gal 319) in Sy// 122” (iv/B.C.) ὀμόσαι δ] ἀγγέλλων. For the presumably Christian ‘‘angel” inscriptions from Thera see Deissmann LAE, Ῥ. 279 with accompanying facsimile, and the paper “It is his Angel” (J. H. M.) in 71.5 1902, p. 519 f. Add (from Cronert) 7G XII. iii. 933. In Archzv iii. p. 445, No. 67, is published a Greek inscription from Assouan of the time of M. Aurelius, which begins—MeyaAy τύχῃ τοῦ [θε]ο[ῦ. . . τ]ῶν ἀνγέλων τῆς [ἱ]ερεί[ας] : cf. alsop. 451 No. 94 (time of Diocletian), Ὑπὲρ εὐχῆς τῶν ἀνγέλων ’Epeonvol ἀνέθηκαν | κτὰ. Οἱ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ, as in 1 Tim 54, occurs in the extremely interesting Jewish inscription Sy// 816'° κύριε Oo | πάντα ἐ[φ)ορῶν kal οἱ ἄνγελοι θεοῦ. Dittenberger assigns it to i/A.D. and yet…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel.

ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,

messenger, envoy, [Refs 8th c.BC+] — proverbial, Ἀράβιος ἄ., of a loquacious person, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. generally, one that announces or tells, e.g. of birds of augury, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἄ. ἄφθογγος, of a beacon, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of the nightingale, ὄρνις.. Διὸς ἄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. angel, [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]

4. in later philosophical, semi-divine being, ἡλιακοὶ ἄ.[Refs 4th c.AD+] in R.2.243 K.; ἄ. καὶ ἀρχάγγελοι[Refs 5th c.AD+]: also in mystical and magical writings, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. title of Artemis at Syracuse, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel: messenger.

ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄγγελος

aggelos

from aggello (probably derived from 71; compare 34) (to bring

tidings); a messenger; especially an "angel"; by implication, a

pastor:--angel, messenger.

see GREEK for 71

see GREEK for 34

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄγγελος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

an angel, messenger

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγγέλλω angellō 1x

to tell, to announce, Jn. 20:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄγγελος a messenger, envoy, Hom., Hdt., attic

generally, one that announces, of birds of augury, Il.; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, Theogn.; Διὸς ἄγγ., of the nightingale, Soph.; c. gen. rei, ἄγγ. κακῶν ἐμῶν id. Soph.

a divine messenger, an angel, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

By the word "angels" (i.e. "messengers" of God) we ordinarily understand a race of spiritual beings of a nature exalted far above that of man, although infinitely removed from that of God--whose office is "to do him service in heaven, and by his appointment to succor and defend men on earth. I. Scriptural use of the word . --There are many passages in which the expression "angel of God" is certainly used for a manifestation of God himself (Genesis 22:11) with Genesis 22:12 and Exod 3:2 with Exod 3:6 and Exod 3:14 It is to be observed, also, that side by side with these expressions we read of God’s being manifested in the…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Created by God and Christ

Ne 9:6; Col 1:16

- Worship God and Christ

Ne 9:6; Php 2:9-11; Heb 1:6

- Are ministering Spirits

1Ki 19:5; Ps 68:17; 104:4; Lu 16:22; Ac 12:7-11; 27:23; Heb 1:7,14

- Communicate the will of God and Christ

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Ministering

Ge 16:7; 19:16; 22:11; Ex 14:19; 23:20; 1Ki 19:5; Ps 91:11; Isa 63:9

Da 3:28; 6:22; Mr 1:13; Lu 16:22; Ac 5:19; 12:7; 27:23; Heb 1:14

(2) Appear to Men

Ge 32:1; Nu 22:31; Jud 2:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%angel
angel52% · 95×angels43% · 79×messenger2% · 4×other renderings3% · 6×

184 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject49%adverbial23%object14%indirect object10%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἀποστέλλωI send forth, seαὐτός
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
καίand, even, also,ὁράωI see, look upon
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,ἐνθυμέομαιI meditate upon,αὐτός
ἑπτάIndec
Article the
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheπατάσσωI strikeὑποτάσσωI place under, s
ἄγγελοςangels176×
what comes after →
Article the
ἐνθεόςGod, a godἔχωI have, hold, po
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἐντέλλομαιI give orders, cμετά
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
φαίνωI shine, appear,ἐφίστημιI stand by, am uκατά
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀφορίζωI rail off, sepaἐπισυνάγωI collect, gatheοὐNeg
ἐν
Article theοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaλευκόςwhite, bright

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄγγελος · 176× in the New Testament
Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Hebrews Mark 1 Corinthians John Galatians 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 119 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.177c. AD 40

„ὁ θεός, ᾧ εὐηρέστησαν οἱ πατέρες μου Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαάκ, ὁ θεὸς ὁ τρέφων με ἐκ νεότητος ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ ῥυόμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν, εὐλογήσαι τὰ παιδία ταῦτα“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.73c. AD 75–95

πολλοὶ γὰρ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ γυναιξὶ συνιόντες ὑβριστὰς ἐγέννησαν παῖδας καὶ παντὸς ὑπερόπτας καλοῦ διὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τῇ δυνάμει πεποίθησιν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.4c. AD 100

ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡ περιτομή, ἐφ̓ ᾗ πεποίθασιν, κατήργηται, περιτομὴν γὰρ εἴρηκεν οὐ σαρκὸς γενηθῆναι: ἀλλὰ παρέβησαν, ὅτι ἄγγελος πονηρὸς ἐσόφιζεν αὐτούς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 5th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59408Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)276 BC–227 BC

τὸ ἐφόδιον, ὅπως ἂν ἀνακομισθῶ πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ δοκῆι με αὐτοῦ καταρρᾳθυμεῖν. καὶ ἄγγελόν μοι ἀπέστειλε καλῶν με. σὺ οὖν μοι τί συντάσσεις; εὐτύχει.

BASP 20 (1983), p. 44-Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 287

τὸν σταχθέντα ἐνιαύσιον χρόνον· καὶ ἐμοῦ ται τε Κορνηλίου ἀποπληρώσαντος καθʼ ὁμοιότητα καὶ ἐγὼ ἀγγελῶ τὸν ὁμογνήσιον σοῦ ἀδελφὸν Διόσκορον τῷ ἑξῆς ἔτει ἐκτελοῦντα καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν αὐτὸν ἐνιαύσιον

Ch.L.A. 11 517 descr.Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 376–AD 425

α … ατερα … α … ω … ταύταις ταῖς φωναῖς ἐχρήσατο ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ μου ὁ ῥυσάμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν μου. διό, γνήσιε τέκνον

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
οἱho those G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
those19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἔχοντεςechō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.
Tyndale gloss
to have/be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NPM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%having
having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
μήNeg
Article theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep
ὅς
καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist
χρείαneed, necessity, bus
οὐNegαὐτόςὅς
ἔχωhaving709×
what comes after →
Article the
ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegὅς
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me
οὖςthe ear
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we
Article theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
τὰςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APF — Article · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἑπτὰhepta seven G2033 Adjective · nominative
88× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for the number seven, used in the Bible to describe completeness or perfection, as seen in Matthew 12:45 and Mark 8:5.
Amplified meaning
complete, perfect
Tyndale gloss
seven
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἑπτά (i.e., *hepta*) means 'seven' and is an indeclinable numeral. It appears in various New Testament passages, including Matthew and Acts. The entries note its use as a mystical number and in references to specific groups or concepts, but there is no significant disagreement among the lexicons.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά

indecl.,

seven: Mt 12:45 18:22 (cf. ἑβδομηκοντάκις), Mk 8:5, al.; οἱ ἐ, Ac 21:8

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἑπτά. As we have no fresh light from our sources, it lies outside our sphere to discuss the uses of this number in the NT, but reference may be made to the notes by Allen on Mk 16%, and by Moffatt (in ΞΟ 7) on Rev 51. Note also Ac 1219 Ὁ κατέβησαν τοὺς { βαθμούς and Ey. Petr. 8 ἐπέχρισαν ἑπτὰ σφραγῖδας. MGr ἑφτά shows the aspirate in compensation for the loss (in pronunciation) of the rough breathing.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἑπτά (hepta) — seven.

ἑπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά,

indeclinable seven, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; as a mystical number, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; αἱ ἑ. νῆσοι the seven largest islands, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὰ ἑ. θεάματα the [Refs 1st c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. σοφισταί the [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. alone, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

2. οἱ ἑ., board of magistrates at Olbia, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. ἄνδρες, = Latin septemviri epulones, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sept[macutenull], cf. Sanskrit saptá, Latin septem (fancifully connected with σέβομαι, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἑπτά

hepta

a primary number; seven:--seven.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἑπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά

Indec.num.

seven

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἑπτά hepta 88x

seven, indecl. numeral, Mt. 15:34, 37; by Jewish usage for a round number, Mt. 12:45; Lk. 11:26

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἑπτά seven, Lat. septem, Hom., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sev'-'-n (shebha`; hepta).

See NUMBER.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Seven

This number occurs frequently in Scripture, and in such connections as lead to the supposition that it has some typical meaning. On the seventh day God rested, and hallowed it (Gen. 2:2, 3). The division of time into weeks of seven days each accounts for many instances of the occurrence of this number. This number has been called the symbol of perfection, and also the symbol of rest. “Jacob’s seven years’ service to Laban; Pharaoh’s seven fat oxen and seven lean ones; the seven branches of the golden candlestick; the seven trumpets and the seven priests who sounded them; the seven days’ siege of Jericho; the seven churches, seven spirits, seven stars, seven seals, seven vials, and many others, sufficiently prove the importance of this sacred number” (see Lev. 25:4;

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The frequent recurrence of certain numbers in the sacred literature of the Hebrews is obvious to the most superficial reader, but seven so far surpasses the rest, both in the frequency with which it recurs and in the importance of the objects with which it is associated, that it may fairly be termed the representative symbolic number. The influence of the number seven was not restricted to the Hebrews; it prevailed among the Persians, ancient Indians, Greeks and Romans. The peculiarity of the Hebrew view consists in the special dignity of the seventh, and not simply in that of seen. The Sabbath being the seventh day suggested the adoption of seven as the coefficient, so to say, for their appointment of all sacred periods; and we thus find the 7th month ushered in by the Feast of Trumpets, and signalized by the celebration of the Feast of Tabernacles and the Great Day of Atonement; 7…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

As from the beginning this was the number of days in the week, so it often has in Scripture a sort of emphasis attached to it, and is very generally used as a round or perfect number. Clean beasts were taken into the ark by sevens, Ge 7:1-24. The years of plenty and famine in Egypt were marked by sevens, Ge 41:1-57. With the Jews, not only was there a seventh day Sabbath, but every seventh year was a Sabbath, and after every seven times seven years came a jubilee. Their great feasts of unleavened bread and of tabernacles were observed for seven days; the number of animals in many of their sacrifices was limited to seven. The golden candlestick had seven branches. Seven priests with seven trumpets went around the walls of Jericho seven days, and seven times on the seventh day. In…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
98%seven
seven98% · 86×other renderings2% · 2×

88 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object41%subject31%adverbial11%predicate10%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 88 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἔχωI have, hold, poἐκ
κεφαλήthe head
ἔχωI have, hold, poκαίand, even, also,ἑπτάIndec
λέγωI say, speak
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,
ἡμέραa day
διατρίβωI tarry, continuαὐτοῦhere, thereἐπιμένωI remain, tarry,
ἑαυτοῦ
μετάπονηρόςevil, bad, wicke
ἑπτάseven88×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
κέραςa hornὀλίγος& AdvεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenger
Article theὅςἑπτάIndec
ἐκκλησίαan assembly, congreg
εἰμίI am, existArticle theεἰς
πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit
Article theὅς
ἀστήρa star
ὅςἄγγελοςan angel, messenἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἑπτά · 88× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Mark Acts Luke Hebrews
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 189 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 91c. AD 40

διχῶς ἑβδομὰς λέγεται, ἡ μὲν ἐντὸς δεκάδος, ἥτις ἑπτάκις μονάδι μόνῃ μετρεῖται συνεστῶσα ἐκ μονάδων ἑπτά, ἡ δ’ ἐκτὸς δεκάδος, ἀριθμὸς οὗ πάντως ἀρχὴ μονὰς κατὰ τοὺς διπλασίους ἢ τριπλασίους ἢ συνόλως ἀναλογοῦντας ἀριθμούς, ὡς ἔχει ὁ ἑξηκοντατέσσαρα…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.63c. AD 75–95

Ἀνώχου δὲ Ἰαράδης υἱὸς ἦν, ἐκ δὲ τούτου Μαρουῆλος, οὗ γίνεται παῖς Μαθουσάλας, τοῦ δὲ Λάμεχος, ᾧ παῖδες ὑπῆρξαν ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ἐκ δύο γυναικῶν αὐτῷ φύντες Σελλᾶς καὶ Ἄδας.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.8.2c. AD 140

ἐμβλέψασά μοι ὑπεμειδίασεν καὶ λέγει μοι: Βλέπεις ἑπτὰ γυναῖκας κύκλῳ τοῦ πύργου;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Athen.. 23Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 82

ζ, ἐν Θεαδελφίαι τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοΐτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογοῦσιν Δῖος ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι ἑπτὰ οὐλὴ δακτύλῳ πρώτῳ χειρὸς ἀριστερᾶς καὶ Ὦσις ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι τεσσάρων οὐλὴ ποδὶ ἀριστερῶι

P.Alex. 7Dionysias (Arsinoites)AD 113

τέσσαρας καὶ τοὺς τόκους ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι τῷ Διοσκόρῳ ἐν μηνὶ Τῦβι τοῦ εἰσίοντος ἕπτα καὶ δεκάτου ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ μηδὲν ἐλαττουμένου τοῦ Διοσκόρου

P.Amh. 2 121ArsinoitesAD 160

Ἁθὺρ η. διέγραψε Σαβεῖνος Ζωσίμου ὑπὲρ ζυτηρᾶς κατʼ ἄνδρα τοῦ διεληλυθότος κγ ἔτους δραχμὰς ἑπτὰ τετρώβολον, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ζ τετρώβολον. κδ ἔτους Ἁθὺρ η. διέγραψε Σαβεῖνος Ζωσίμου γεωργὸς ιζ

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
πληγὰςplēgē plagues G4127 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
22× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means a blow, wound, or plague, like the wounds Jesus received, as seen in Revelation 13:3. It can also mean a calamity or disaster. In the Bible, it's used to describe physical harm or suffering.
Amplified meaning
blows, wounds, or judgments
Tyndale gloss
plague/blow/wound
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πληγή (plēgē) means a blow, stripe, or wound, derived from the verb πλήσσω (plēssō). It can also refer to a calamity or plague, particularly in a metaphorical sense. This term appears in several New Testament passages, including Luke 10:30 and Revelation 9:20, where it conveys both physical and figurative meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πληγή, ῆς, ἡ

(< πλήσσω),

[in LXX chiefly for מַכָּה, also for מַגֶּפָה etc.;]

a blow, stripe, wound: pl., Lk 10:30 12:48, Ac 16:23, 33, II Co 6:5 11:23; ἡ π. τ. θανάτου (RV, death-stroke), Re 13:3, 12; τ. μαχαίρας, Re 13:14.

Metaph., a calamity, plague: Re 9:18, 20 11:6 15:1, 6, 8 16:9, 21 18:4, 8 21:9 22:18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πληγή, -ῆς, ἧ, (πλήσσω), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 137, also for 7539 ; 1. a blow, stripe: plur., Lk. x. 30; xii. 48; Acts xvi. 23,33; 2 Co. vi.5; xi. 23; a wound: ἡ πληγὴ τοῦ θανάτου, deadly wound [R. V. death-stroke], Rey. xiii. 3, 12; τῆς μαχαίρας, wound made by a sword [sword-stroke], Rey. xiii. 14. [On its idiomatic omission (Lk. xii. 47, ete.) ef. Β. 82 (13); W. § 64, 4.] ὩΣ a public calamity, heavy affliction, [ οἵ. Eng. plague], (now tormenting now destroying the bodies of men, and sent by God as a punishment) : Rev. ix. 18 [Ree. om.], 20; xi. 6; xv. 1, 6, 8; xvi. 9,[21]; xviii. 4,85 xxi.9; xxii. 18. [Cf. md. Διός, Soph. Aj. 137 (cf. 279); al.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πληγή, “blow ’’: cf. Chrest. IL. 69 (B.C. 246) πληγάς μοι ἐνέβαλεν, P Tebt I. 4419 (B.c. 114) ἔδωκεν πληγὰς πλείους ἧι [εἸῖχεν ῥάβδωι, P Fay 1217 (c. π.6. 103) ἤγαγον μεθ᾽ ὕβρεως καὶ πληγῶν, ‘they dragged me away with insults and blows,’’ and P Tebt 11. 33129 (c. A.b. 131) ἐϊπήνεγκά[ν μο]ι πληγὰς εἰς πᾶν μέλ[ο]ς το[ῦ σ]ώματος. Add from the law of astynomy at Pergamum, carved on stone in the time of Trajan, OG/S 483177, αὐτὸς μαστιγούσθω ἐν τῶι κύφωνι (‘‘ the pillory’’) πληγαῖς πεντήκοντα, and see also Sy// 737 (=* 1109)** (A.p. 178) ἐὰν δέ τις ἄχρι πληγῶν ἔλθῃ, ἀπογραφέστω ὁ πληγεὶς πρὸς τὸν ἱερέα ἢ τὸν ἀνθιερέα. For the ellipsis οἵ πληγάς in Lk 1247, 2 Cor 11%, cf. Herodas IIT. 77, V. 33 (with Headlam’s…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πληγή (plēgē) — plague/blow/wound.

πληγ-ή,

Doric dialect πλᾱγά, ἡ, (πλήσσω) blow, stroke, πεπληγὼν πληγῇσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently joined with Verbs of cognate signification, πέπληγμαι καιρίαν πληγήν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τύπτεσθαι τῇ δημοσίᾳ μάστιγι ν πληγάς Legal cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently omitted, τρίτην ἐπενδίδωμι [NT+5th c.BC+]; καιρίῃ (i.e. πληγῇ) τετύφθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἐμβαλεῖν, ἐντείνειν τινί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πληγαῖς ζημιοῦν, κολάζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πληγῆς ἄρχειν strike the first blow, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς π. στέγειν, of the shell of a tortoise, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πληγή

plege

from 4141; a stroke; by implication, a wound; figuratively, a

calamity:--plague, stripe, wound(-ed).

see GREEK for 4141

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πληγή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

a blow, stripe, wound

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πληγή plēgē 22x

a blow, stroke, stripe, Lk. 10:30; 12:48; meton. a wound, Acts 16:33; Rev. 13:3, 12, 14; from the Hebrew, a plague, affliction, calamity, Rev. 9:20; 11:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πληγή πληγή, doric πλα_γά, ἡ,

πλήσσω a blow, stroke, Lat. plaga, Hom., etc.; πληγὴν πέπληγμαι καιρίαν Aesch.; in such phrases πληγήν or πληγάς is often omitted, πολλὰς τυπτόμενος Ar., etc.:—the person struck is said πληγὰς λαβεῖν id. Ar.; the striker πληγὰς δοῦναι, ἐμβάλλειν, ἐντείνειν τινί Xen.

a stroke by lightning, Hes.: a blow, stroke of calamity, Aesch.; πλ. θεοῦ a blow from heaven, Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%plagues
plagues45% · 10×plague14% · 3×wound14% · 3×wounds9% · 2×beatings9% · 2×blows5% · 1×stripes5% · 1×

22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial41%object36%subject23%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐκἀπόἐν
ἑπτάIndec
Article the
ἐν
περισσῶςComp
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτός
ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, d
δέbut, on the othe
πληγήplagues22×
what comes after →
Article the
θάνατοςdeathμάχαιραa swordἑπτάIndec
οὗτος
ἀποκτείνωI put to death, οὐδέNegκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
σφόδραexceedingly, greἵναin order that, sθάνατοςdeath
ἐπιτίθημιI put, place upon, l
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
δέρωI flay, flog, scourg
ὀλίγος& Adv

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπληγή · 22× in the New Testament
Revelation 2 Corinthians Acts Luke
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 50 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 63c. AD 40

ταῖς γὰρ συνεχέσι πληγαῖς γυμναζόμενα καὶ βίᾳ τὴν φορὰν ἀνωθοῦντα κραταιότερά τέ ἐστι καὶ πιαίνεται μᾶλλον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.50c. AD 75–95

ἀφείλετο δὲ καὶ τὸν ὄφιν τὴν φωνὴν ὀργισθεὶς ἐπὶ τῇ κακοηθείᾳ τῇ πρὸς τὸν Ἄδαμον καὶ ἰὸν ἐντίθησιν ὑπὸ τὴν γλῶτταν αὐτῷ πολέμιον ἀποδείξας ἀνθρώποις καὶ ὑποθέμενος κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς φέρειν τὰς πληγάς, ὡς ἐν ἐκείνῃ τοῦ τε κακοῦ τοῦ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.12c. AD 100

λέγει γὰρ ὁ θεὸς τὴν πληγὴν τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ ὅτι ἐξ αὐτῶν: Ὅταν πατάξωσιν τὸν ποιμένα ἑαυτῶν, τότε ἀπολεῖται τὰ πρόβατα τῆς ποίμνης.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Louvre 1 1Soknopaiu Nesos (ArsinoitesAD 13

ἐφʼ ὃ ἔχω συκήρατον ἐξετρύγησεν βιαίως ὅσον ἠβούλετο. πρὸς ὃν καὶ λογοποιούμενος ἔδωκέν μοι πληγὰς πλείους καὶ κατέαξεν κράνωι τὴν ἀριστερὰν χεῖρα καὶ ἀπηνέγκατό μου χιτῶνα καὶ ζώνην καὶ

P.Sijp. 14Philadelphia (?) (Arsinoites)AD 22

θυγάτηρ … … ερε … οῦς, αἱ δύο, καταπεριστᾶσαι τὴν θυγατέρα μου ἔδοσαν αὐτῆι πληγὰς πλείους καὶ ἀφήρπασαν τὸν ταύτης χιτῶνα καὶ τὰς τοῦ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τέσσαρας. διὸ ἀξιῶ,

P.Athen.. 32Karanis? (Arsinoites)AD 39

εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν μου ἀπηνέγκαντο ἱματισμὸν … πάντες βε … σκεύη καὶ ἐπήνεγκάν μοι πληγὰς πλείστας εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματος … ἐπιθέντες τη … ὥρας δ τῆς

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἐκek out G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκout913×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ναοῦnaos temple G3485 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
45× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A temple refers to a sacred place of worship, like the one in Jerusalem. In the New Testament, it can also mean the innermost part of the temple. The term is used in Acts 17:24 and Acts 19:24.
Amplified meaning
a sacred place of worship, the inner sanctuary
Tyndale gloss
temple
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ναός (naos) refers to a temple or shrine, specifically the inner sanctuary where a deity resides. In the New Testament, it often denotes the temple in Jerusalem, distinguishing it from the larger temple complex. It is also used metaphorically for Christians as the dwelling place of the Spirit of God. Notably, there is a distinction between ναός and ἱερόν, the latter referring to the entire temple area.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἱερόν, ναός from a scan

WE have in our Version only the one word ‘temple’ for both of these; nor is it easy to perceive in what manner we could have marked the distinction between them; which is yet a very real one, and one the marking of which would often add much to the clearness and precision of the sacred narrative (see Fuller, A Pisgah Sight of Palestine, p. 427). ὑἹερόν (=templum) is the whole com8ὃπι.:. SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. Il pass of the sacred enclosure, the τέμενος, including the outer courts, the porches, porticoes, and other buildings subordinated to the temple itself; αἱ οἰκοδομαὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ (Matt. xxiv. 1). But ναός (= ‘ edes’) from ναίω, “ habito,’ as the proper habitation of God (Acts vii. 48; xvii. 24; I Cor. vi. 19); the οἶκος τοῦ Θεοῦ (Matt. xii. 4; cf. Exod. Xxill. 19), the German ‘duom’ or ‘ domus,’ is the temple itself, that by especial right so called, being the heart and centre…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ναός, -οῦ, ὁ,

(Att. νεώς; < ναίω, to inhabit),

[in LXX (νεώς, II Mac 6:2, al.) chiefly for הֵיכָל;]

a temple (Hom., Pind., al.).

The inmost part of a temple, the shrine (Hdt., Xen., al.); in NT,

generally: pl., Ac 17:24; of silver models of a heathen shrine, Ac 19:24;

of the temple building proper, or sanctuary, at Jerusalem, as distinct from τ. ἱερόν (q.v.), the whole temple enclosure: Mt 23:16, 17, 35 27:5, 40, Mk 14:58 15:29, Jo 2:19, 20, Re 11:2; (τοῦ) θεοῦ, Mt 26:61 27:51, Mk 15:38

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ναός, -ov, ὁ, (ναίω to dwell), Sept. for Danity used of the temple at Jerusalem, but only of the sacred edifice (or sanctuary) itself, consisting of the Holy place and the Holy of holies (in class. Grk. used of the sanctuary or cell of a temple, where the image of the go | was placed, called also δόμος, σηκός, which is to be distinguished from τὸ ἱερόν, the whole temple, the entire consecrated enclosure; this distinction is observed also in the Bible; see ἱερόν, p. 299°): Mt. xxiii. 16 sq. 35; xxvii. 40; Mk. xiv. 58; xv. 29; Jn.ii. 19sq.; Rev. xi. 2; nor need Mt. xxvii. 5 be regarded as an exception, provided we suppose that Judas in his desperation entered the Holy place, which no one but the priests was allowed to enter [ (note the εἰς (al. ἐν) of TTrWH)]. with θεοῦ, rod θεοῦ, added: Mt. xxvi. 61; 1 Co. iii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 16; 2 Th. ii. 4; Rey. xi. 1; used specifically of the Holy…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ναός (naos) — temple.

νᾱός, ὁ,

Doric dialect, Thess., etc. form, [Refs 5th c.BC+], rare in Attic dialect Prose and Comedy texts, [LXX+5th c.BC+] only in 2 Ma.), [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Ionic dialectνηός, always in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative νειῴ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Attic dialect νεώς (Attic Inscrr. of see-3rd c.BC (see. below), once in Trag. (see. above), frequently in Prose authors and found in Comedy texts (see. below)); declension, nominative νεώς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; dative νεῴ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative νεών [LXX+5th c.BC+]; on the accent see Hdn.Gr.1.8: Aeolic dialect ναῦος [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Spartan ναϝός [prev. work]5(1).1564 (plural, found at Delos, 5th-4th c.BC):—temple, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. inmost part of a temple, shrine containing the image of the god, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

III. portable shrine carried in processions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ναός

naos

from a primary naio (to dwell); a fane, shrine, temple :--shrine,

temple. Compare 2411.

see GREEK for 2411

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ναός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a temple, shrine

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ναός naos 45x

pr. a dwelling; the dwelling of a deity, a temple, Mt. 26:61; Acts 7:48; used figuratively of individuals, Jn. 2:19; 1 Cor. 3:16; spc. the cell of a temple; hence, the Holy Place of the Temple of Jerusalem, Mt. 23:35; Lk. 1:9; a model of a temple, a shrine, Acts 19:24

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

tem'-p'l (hekhal, "palace"; sometimes, as in 1Ki 6:3,5, etc.; Eze 41:1,15 ff, used for "the holy place" only; bayith, "house," thus always in the Revised Version (British and American); hieron, naos):

A. STRUCTURE AND HISTORY

I. SOLOMON'S TEMPLE

I. INTRODUCTORY

1. David's Project

2. Plans and Preparations

3. Character of the Building

4. Site of the Temple

5. Phoenician Assistance

II. THE TEMPLE BUILDING

1. In General

2. Dimensions, Divisions and Adornments

3. The Side-Chambers

4. The Porch and Pillars

III. COURTS, GATES ANY ROYAL BUILDINGS

1. The Inner Court

(1) Walls

(2) Gates

2. The Great Court

3. The Royal Buildings

IV. FURNITURE OF THE TEMPLE

1. The Sanctuary

(1) The "Debhir"

(2) The "Hekhal"

2. The Court (Inner)

(1) The Altar

(2) The Molten (Bronze) Sea

(3) The Layers and Their Bases

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Temple

First used of the tabernacle, which is called “the temple of the Lord” (1 Sam. 1:9). In the New Testament the word is used figuratively of Christ’s human body (John 2:19, 21). Believers are called “the temple of God” (1 Cor. 3:16, 17). The Church is designated “an holy temple in the Lord” (Eph. 2:21). Heaven is also called a temple (Rev. 7:5). We read also of the heathen “temple of the great goddess Diana” (Acts 19:27).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

There is perhaps no building of the ancient world which has excited so much attention since the time of its destruction as the temple which Solomon built by Herod. Its spoils were considered worthy of forming the principal illustration of one of the most beautiful of Roman triumphal arches, and Justinian’s highest architectural ambition was that he might surpass it. Throughout the middle ages it influenced to a considerable degree the forms of Christian churches, and its peculiarities were the watchwords and rallying-points of all associations of builders. When the French expedition to Egypt, int he first years of this century, had made the world familiar with the wonderful architectural remains of that country, every one jumped to the conclusion that Solomon’s temple must have been designed after an Egyptian model. The discoveries in Assyria by Botta and Layard have within the last…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A building hallowed by the special presence of God, and consecrated to his worship. The distinctive idea of a temple, contrasted with all other buildings, is that it is the dwelling-place of a deity; and every heathen temple had its idol, but the true and living God dwelt "between the cherubim" in the Holy of Holies at Jerusalem. Hence, figuratively applied, a temple denotes the church of Christ, 2Th 2:4 Re 3:12; heaven, Ps 11:4 Re 7:15; and the soul of the believer, in which the Holy Spirit dwells, 1Co 3:16,17 6:19 2Co 6:16.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%temple
temple93% · 43×temples4% · 2×shrines2% · 1×

46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial49%object22%subject20%predicate9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 45 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐκκαταλύωI break up, over
γάρfor
Article theἐγώ
χειροποίητοςdone or made with ha
ἐν
ποιέωI do, make
ἀργυροκόποςa silversmith
ὅτιthat, since, because
οἶδαI know, remember
ναόςtemple45×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁγιάζωI make holy, san
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐνοἰκοδομέωI build, build u
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτος
καίand, even, also,Article the
θεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, existμετά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceναός · 45× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke John Mark 2 Corinthians Acts 2 Thessalonians Ephesians
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 41 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τῆς σκηνῆς ἣν κατεσκεύασε Μωυσῆς ἐν τῇ ἐρημίᾳ εἰς τιμὴν τοῦ θεοῦ, ὥστε ναὸν εἶναι δοκεῖν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.11c. AD 100

γενώμεθα πνευματικοί, γενώμεθα ναὸς τέλειος τῷ θεῷ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 23.5c. AD 96

ἐπ’ ἀληθείας ταχὺ καὶ ἐξαίφνης τελειωθήσεται τὸ βούλημα αὐτοῦ, συνεπιμαρτυρούσης καὶ τῆς γραφῆς, ὅτι ταχὺ ἥξει καὶ οὐ χρονιεῖ, καὶ ἐξαίφνης ἥξει ὁ κύριος εἰς τὸν ναὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὁ ἅγιος, ὃν ὑμεῖς προσδοκᾶτε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC undated

1 ἐκ δὲ τῶν ἀπολειπομένων δύο , τόν τε ναόν μου παρῃτησάμην, διὰ τὸ θεοῖς μόνοις δ ταύτην τὴν τιμὴν ὑπʼ ἀνθρώπων δικαίως ἀπονέμεσθαι,

P.Mert. 2 63ArsinoitesAD 58

καὶ διὰ παντὸς ὑγιαίνειν. ἠγόρακά σοι τὰς ἐλαίας. αἰτοῦσι πανταχόθεν εἰς τὴν εὐσέβειαν τοῦ ναοῦ Σούχου, πάντας ἀνθρώπους, καὶ Ῥωμαίους καὶ Ἀλεξανδρεῖς καὶ κατοικοῦντας ἐν τῶι Ἀρσινοΐτηι. αἰτοῦσι Πομπήιον.

P.Bodl. 1 29Soknopaiu Nesos? (Arsinoites)AD 101

ε … τος … παστοφόρων Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου καὶ … θεοῦ ἐπηκόου καὶ ναοῦ Καίσαρος Θεοῦ Σεβαστοῦ … περι … … … … … … θ

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
οἳhos, hē who G3739 Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NPM — Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NPM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwho1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἦσανeimi were G1510 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-IAI-3P — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίwere2457×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
Article theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ἐνδεδυμένοιenduō having clothed themselves in G1746 Verb · perfect · middle · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
28× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To put on clothes or armor, like in Matthew 6:25 and Ephesians 6:11, where we're told to clothe ourselves with God's protection. This word is used to describe physical and spiritual dressing. It's about covering ourselves with something, whether it's clothes or God's power.
Amplified meaning
clothed with, arrayed in
Tyndale gloss
to put on
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐνδύω means 'to put on' or 'to clothe,' derived from the roots for 'in' and 'to sink.' It covers a range of meanings from literally putting on clothes to metaphorically assuming characteristics or roles, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 27:31 and Romans 13:14. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν-δύω

(ἐνδύνω, II Ti 3:6),

[in LXX chiefly for לָבַשׁ ;]

c. acc pers., Mt 27:28 (WH, mg., R, mg.); c. dupl. acc, Mt 27:31, Mk 15:20, Lk 15:22; mid., to put on oneself, be clothed with: c. acc rei, Mt 6:25, Mk 6:9, Lk 8:27 12:22, Ac 12:21; ptcp., Mt 22:11, Mk 1:6,

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐνδύω (enduō) — to put on.

ἐνδύω

or ἐνδύνω (ἐνδυνέω variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+], with middle ἐνδύομαι, future -δύσομαι: aorist 1 -εδυσάμη; Epic dialect aorist or imperfect -εδυσόμην: aorist 2 active -έδυν: perfect -δέδῡκα:

I. with accusative of things vel loci, go into,

I.1. of clothes, put on, ἔνδυνε χιτῶνα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν σκευήν[Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect ἐνδέδῡκα, wear, κιθῶνας λινέους [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, ἐν δ᾽ αὐτὸς ἐδύσετο χαλκόν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐνδύεσθαι ὅπλα variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν Ταρκύνιον ἐνδύεσθαι assume the person of T., [NT+1st c.BC+]:—passive, to be clothed in, have on, ἐσθῆτα ἐνδεδύσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐνδύω

enduo

from 1722 and 1416 (in the sense of sinking into a garment); to invest

with clothing (literally or figuratively):--array, clothe (with),

endue, have (put) on.

see GREEK for 1722

see GREEK for 1416

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐνδύω

v.

I put on, clothe

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐνδύω endyō 27x

to enter, 2 Tim. 3:6; to put on, clothe, invest, array, Mt. 27:31; Mk. 15:17, 20; mid. clothe one’s self, be clothed, Mt. 22:11, 27, 31; trop. to be clothed with spiritual gifts, graces, or character, Lk. 24:49; Rom. 13:14

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐνδύω and -δύνω with Mid. ἐνδύομαι fut. -δύσομαι aor1 -εδυσάμην and aor2 act. -έδυν c. acc., to go into,

of clothes, to put on, Lat. induere sibi, ἔνδυνε χιτῶνα Il.; πέπλον Soph.:—so in Mid., Il., etc.:—perf. ἐνδέδυκα, to wear κιθῶνας Hdt.:—metaph. to put on, assume the person of . . , NTest.

to enter, to press into, c. acc., Il., etc.:—also, ἐνδ. εἰς . . , Thuc., etc.:—also c. dat., Xen.:—absol. to enter, Hdt.

Causal in pres. ἐνδύω, fut. -δύσω, aor1 -έδυσαLat. induere alicui, to put on another, to clothe in, c. dupl. acc., Xen.

to clothe, τινά Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RMP-NPM — Verb · perfect · middle · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RMP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Middle Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 68 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Confusion of Tongues 31c. AD 40

5, 31), ἵνα ἐνδοιασμὸν καὶ ἐπαμφοτερισμόν, ἀβεβαίου ψυχῆς διαθέσεις, ἀποδυσάμενος τὴν ὀχυρωτάτην καὶ βεβαιοτάτην διάθεσιν, πίστιν, ἐνδύσηται.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.35c. AD 75–95

Ὡς δὲ ταῦτα περὶ τὸν Ἰώσηπον τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐπέπρακτο, τί ποιήσαντες ἂν ἔξω τῆς ὑπονοίας παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ γενηθεῖεν ἐζήτουν, καὶ δὴ τὸν χιτωνίσκον, ὃν ἀφῖκτο μὲν πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰώσηπος ἐνδεδυμένος, περιῃρήκεσαν δʼ αὐτὸν ὅτε καθίεσαν εἰς τὸν λάκκον,…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.2c. AD 100

οὐδ̓ ἂν κάμψητε ὡς κρίκον τὸν τράχηλον ὑμῶν καὶ σάκκον ἐνδύσησθε καὶ σποδὸν ὑποστρώσητε, οὐδ̓ οὕτως καλέσετε νηστείαν δεκτήν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Oxy. 2 285 RoOxyrhynchosAD 50

α ἔτει Τιβερίου Κλαυδίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος πολλῇ βίᾳ χρώμενος ἀφήρπασεν ὃν ἤμην ἐνδεδυμένος χιτῶνα λινοῦν ἄξιον δραχμῶν ὀκτώ , καὶ διέσεισέν με ἄλλας δραχμὰς τέσσαρας , καὶ

O.Krok. 2 182KrokodiloAD 98–AD 117

τὸν αὐτῆς παρέπαισεν … να ὡς σὸν ὧδε ἐχόνομα ἡ δὲ εἶχεν τὰ ἐμὰ ἐνδύσασθαι. καὶ γράψεις μοι διὰ τίνος σοι πέμψω τὸν χαλκόν. ἄσπασαι Ἀρριανόν. ἔρρωσο.

P.Oxy. 51 3616OxyrhynchosAD 201–AD 300

ἐτῶν ιδ, λευκόχροον, ψελλόν, πλατύρρυγχον, μ … … … … … αε … ν, ἐνδεδυμένον στιχάριον ἐρεοῦν παχὺ καὶ βάλτιον ἀπὸ χρήσεως … ἐνεγκάτω ἐν τοῖς σίγνοις λαμβάνων

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
λίνονlinon linen G3043 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to flax or linen, like the kind used in Revelation 15:6. It can also mean a wick, as in Matthew 12:20.
Amplified meaning
fine, white fabric
Tyndale gloss
linen/wick
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λίνον (linon) refers to flax and items made from it, such as linen cloth and fishing lines. The New Testament uses it in contexts related to linen garments (Revelation 15:6) and a wick (Matthew 12:20). The term also appears in various ancient texts, illustrating its broad application in both practical and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λίνον

(Tr. λῖνον), -ου, τό,

[in LXX: Ex 9:31 (פִּשְׁתָּה), al.;]

flax: Mt 12:20(LXX).

linen: Re 15:6 (R, mg., v.s. λίθος).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λίνον (Treg. λῖνον [so R Gin Mt. as below], incorrectly, for « is short; [cf. Lipsews, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 427), του, τό, Sept. several times for NWI, in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, flax: Ex. ix. 31; linen, as clothing, Rev. xv.6 RG T Trmrg.; the wick of alamp, Mt. xii. 20, after Is. xlii. 3.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λίνον is used with reference to ‘‘linen” cloths or garments, as in Rev 15° PQ (see contra WH WNotes?, p. 139), in such passages as P Oxy X. 12816 (A.D. 21) τὴν τειμὴν τῶν ἑκατὸν λίνων Σινυραιτικῷν, “the price of the hundred cloths of Sinaru,” P Tebt II. 31418 (ii/a.p.) καλῶς π[ο]ιήσις διαπεμψάμενός μοι τὰ λίνα, ‘you will oblige me by sending the cloths,” 26. 406! (6. A.D. 266) λίνα λευκὰ ἀριθμῷ {{β], ‘““white linen cloths twelve in number,” P Leid Wviis (ii/iii a.p.) στώλισον αὐτὸν λίνῳ καθαρῷ, *V4 σὺ δ᾽ ἐν λίνοις ἴσθι καθαροῖς ἑστημμένος, BGU II. 45017 (ii/iii A.D.) περὶ τῶν λίνων, ὧν χρείαν ἔλεγες ἔχειν, δήλωσόν μοι, a/.: cf. P Oxy IV. 73675 (c. A.D. 1) λίνου καὶ ῥαφίδος (ὀβολός), “a needle and thread 1 ob.” (Edd.). As illustrating Rev Zc. Moffatt (26 7᾽ ad /.) aptly cites Plutarch de /szde, 3, 4, where it is explained that the linen surplice was affected by Egyptian votaries of Isis…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λίνον (linon) — linen/wick.

λίνον [ῐ], τό,

anything made of flax (see. near the end)

1. cord, fishingline, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; thread spun from a distaff, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; thread for stringing jewels, ὅρμον χρυσείοισι λίνοισιν ἐερμένον [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; thread used as a ligature, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. metaphorically, thread of destiny spun by the Fates, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ τὸ λ., ={ὑπὲρ μόρον}, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

3. proverbial, with or without negative, λίνον λίνῳ συνάπτειν, i. e. join like with like, deal with matters of like kind, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. fishing-net, ἀψῖσι λίνου ἁλόντε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, hunting-net, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; for catching birds, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; λ. δορκάδεια hunting-nets for gazelles, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λίνον

linon

probably a primary word; flax, i.e. (by implication) "linen":--linen.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λίνον, ου, τό

n.n.

flax, linen

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λίνον linon 2x

flax; by meton. a flaxen wick, Mt. 12:20; linen, Rev. 15:6*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λίνον λί^νον, ου, τό, anything made of flax:

a cord, fishing-line, Il.: the thread spun from a distaff, Eur., etc.; and in pl., id. Eur.:—metaph. the thread of destiny spun by the Fates, Hom., Theocr.:—proverb., λίνον λίνῳ συνάπτειν, i. e. to join like with like, to deal with matters of like kind, Plat.

a fishing-net, Il.:— a hunting-net, Theocr.

linen, linen-cloth, Hom.: sail-cloth, Ar.

flax for spinning, id. Ar.

the plant that produces flax, Lat. linum, Hdt., etc.; λίνου σπέρμα lint-seed, Thuc.

on λίνον ἄειδεν, v. Λίνος II.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

lin'-en (badh, "white linen," used chiefly for priestly robes, buts, "byssus," a fine white Egyptian linen, called in the earlier writings shesh; pesheth, "flax," cadhin; bussos, othonion, linon, sindon): Thread or cloth made of flax.

1. History:

Ancient Egypt was noted for its fine linen (Ge 41:42; Isa 19:9). From it a large export trade was carried on with surrounding nations, including the Hebrews, who early learned the art of spinning from the Egyptians (Ex 35:25) and continued to rely on them for the finest linen (Pr 7:16; Eze 27:7). The culture of flax in Palestine probably antedated the conquest, for in

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Linen

(1.) Heb., pishet, pishtah, denotes “flax,” of which linen is made (Isa. 19:9); wrought flax, i.e., “linen cloth”, Lev. 13:47, 48, 52, 59; Deut. 22:11.

Flax was early cultivated in Egypt (Ex. 9:31), and also in Palestine (Josh. 2:6; Hos. 2:9). Various articles were made of it: garments (2 Sam. 6:14), girdles (Jer. 13:1), ropes and thread (Ezek. 40:3), napkins (

As is well known, is made of the fine fibers of flax, and was much used by the ancients. Four different words in Hebrew are translated in our Bible, "Linen," "fine linen," and "silk:" PISHTAH, Jud 15:14 Eze 44:17,18; BAD, worn by the priests, Ex 28:42 39:28, and by king David, etc., 2Sa 6:14; SHESH, worn by Joseph when governor of Egypt, Ge 41:42, and by the virtuous woman in Pr 31:22, (see SILK;) and BUTZ, of which the veil of the temple and David’s outer mantle were made,

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%linen
linen50% · 1×wick50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
κατάγνυμιI break in piece
ἐνδύωI put on, clothe
ναόςa temple, shrine
λίνονlinen
what comes after →
τύφωI raise smoke
οὐNeg
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
λαμπρόςshining, magnifi

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλίνον · 2× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.183c. AD 75–95

ἥ τε γὰρ βύσσος τὴν γῆν ἀποσημαίνειν ἔοικε διὰ τὸ ἐξ αὐτῆς ἀνεῖσθαι τὸ λίνον, ἥ τε πορφύρα τὴν θάλασσαν τῷ πεφοινῖχθαι τῶν ἰχθύων τῷ αἵματι, τὸν δὲ ἀέρα βούλεται δηλοῦν ὁ ὑάκινθος, καὶ ὁ φοῖνιξ δʼ ἂν εἴη τεκμήριον τοῦ πυρός.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. BC 2nd c. AD
BGU 16 2663Herakleopolites10 BC

Σωτήριχος μετῆλθε ἔσται βουλεῦσαί πως ἐὰν δύνῃ προἀποστεῖλαί τινα πρὸς ειασερον τὸν … λινον χάριν τῶν ἐδαφῶν τοῦ οἴκου· ὁ παρʼ ἐμὲ ἐκλήμπτωρ ἐπʼ ἐμβάσει ἐστίν· φοβοῦμαι αὐτὸν

O.Heid. 260Ta Memnoneia (Theben)AD 199

Καλλίμαχος καὶ Ψενθώτης τελῶναι ν Μεμνονείων. Ἁρβῆθις ἐξάγων λίνον ἁλιευτικὸν α, ἔτους η Ἁθὺρ ζ. ὁμοίως ἄλλο λίνον ἕν .

P.Oxy. 6 929 VoOxyrhynchosAD 176–AD 300

τοῦτό μοι ὑπηρετήσεις. καλῶς ποιήσεις ἀπαιτήσας Τιθόιν τὸν ναυτικὸν δύμα καρυΐνου χιτῶνος ἐν ᾧ λίνον καὶ λέντιον τριβακόν, καὶ ἔρια, ταῦτα δὲ πάντα συνενῆν εἰς τὸν χιτῶνα τὸν καρύϊνον

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
καθαρὸνkatharos pure G2513 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
26× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Something that is clean or pure, like a clean heart in Matthew 5:8. It can describe physical, ceremonial, or moral purity.
Amplified meaning
pure, undefiled
Tyndale gloss
clean
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καθαρός is an adjective meaning 'clean' or 'pure,' used in various contexts including physical cleanliness, ceremonial purity, and moral integrity. It appears in the New Testament in verses like Matthew 23:26 and Acts 18:6, where it describes both tangible items and ethical states. The term is related to the Hebrew word for purity and is often contrasted with concepts of defilement.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — εἰλικρινής, καθαρός from a scan

THE difference between these words is hard to express, even while one may instinctively feel it. They are continually found in company with one another (Plato, Phileb. 52d; Eusebius, Prep. Evan. xv. 15. 4), and words associated with the one are in constant association with the other. EiAcxpevns occurs only twice in the N. T. (Phil. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 1); once also in the Apocrypha (Wisd. vii. 25) ; εἰλικρινεια three times (1 Cor. v. 8; 2 Cor. i. 12: ii. 17). Its etymology, like that of ‘sincere,’ which is its best English rendering, is doubtful, uncertainty in this matter causing also uncertainty in the breathing. Some, as Stallbaum (Plato, Phedo, 66 a, note), connect with ἔλος, ἴλη (εἴλειν, εἴλεῖν), that which is cleansed by much rolling and shaking to and fro in the sieve; ‘ volubili agitatione secretum atque adeocribro purgatum.’? Another more familiar and more beautiful etymology…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καθαρός, -ά, -όν,

[in LXX chiefly for טָהוֹר;]

pure, clean.

Physically: Mt 23:26 27:59, Jo 13:10, 11 (fig.), Jo 15:3 (fig., as of a vine cleansed by pruning), He 10:22, Re 15:6 19:8, 14 21:18, 21.

Ceremonially: Lk 11:41, Ro 14:20, Tit 1:15.

Ethically;

of persons: Jo 13:16, Ac 18:6, Tit 1:15; ὁ κ. τῇ καρδίᾳ (καθαρὸς χειρας, Hdt., i, 35), Mt 5:8; seq. ἀπό (cl. c. gen. simp.; Bl., § 36, 11; Deiss.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καθαρός, -d, -dv; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng. chaste, chasten; Curtius § 26; Vanitek p. 177]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for WW ; clean, pure, (free from the admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulterates, corrupts) ; a. physically : Mt. xxiii. 26; xxvii. 59; Heb. x. 22 (23); Rev. xv. 6; xix. 8, 14, and Ree. in xxii. 1; χρυσίον, purified by fire, Rev. xxi. 18, 21; ina similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted to bear fruit, Jn. xv.3; ὁ NeAoup.. . - καθαρὸς ὅλος (where the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows: ‘he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not need radical renewal, but only to be cleansed from every several fault into which he may fall through intercourse with the unrenewed world’), Jn. xiii. 10. b. in a levitical sense ; clean, i. 6. the use of which is not forbidden, imparts no uncleanness: πάντα καθαρά, Ro.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καθαρός. The word and its derivatives have a wide range of use, being applied physically to animals, land, grain, bread, milk, etc., e.g. Chrest. I. 89° (A.D. 149) κ]αὶ δοκιμάσας (μόσχον) ἐσφράγισα ὡς ἔστιν καθαρός, BGU IV. 1018° (iii/A.D.) παραδώσο (/.dow) τὰς ἀρούρας καθαρὰς ὡς παρέλαβον, P | Oxy VIII. 1124! (A.D. 26) πυρὸν νέο[ν] καθαρὸν ἄδολον, 0. IV. 736% (c. A.D. 1) ἄρτου καθαροῦ παιδ(ῶν), BGU IV. 11098 (B.C. 5) θηλάζουσαν τῶι ἰδίῳ αὐτῆς γάλακτι καθαρῷ, and metaphorically to ‘‘freedom” from disadvantages of various kinds, as in 74. 10407! (ii/A.D.) καθαρ[ὰ]ν yap ἔχων τὴν ψυχὴν οὐδενὸς ἐπιστί. . . .]y τῶν διαβαλόντων, or in the epitaphs Aazbe/ 516! (c. A.D. 1) καθα[ρ]ὰν δὲ φυλάξας [σωφροσύνης ἀρετὴν τόν]δε λέλονχε τάφον, 653. (iii/A.D.) ὡς ἀνίῃ καθαρή, of a mind freed from care: cf. also P Lond 178'3 (A.D. 145) (= II. p. 207) τὸ δὲ χειρόγραφον τοῦτο δισσὸν γραφὲν καθαρὸν ἀπὸ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καθαρός (katharos) — clean.

κᾰθᾰρ-ός, ά, όν,

Doric dialect καθαρός [Refs 5th c.AD+], Aeolic dialect κόθ- [Refs 7th c.BC+]; compare ἀνακαθαίρω, κάθαρσις:

1. physically clean, spotless (not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of persons, cleanly, κ. περὶ ἐσθῆτα [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. clear of admixture, clear, pure, especially of water, Βορυσθένης ῥέει καθαρὸς παρὰ θολεροῖσι [LXX+5th c.BC+]; κ. φάος, φέγγος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of white bread, Wilcken [LXX+3rd c.BC+]; ἄλευρον κ. [Refs]; χρυσίον, ἀργύριον -ώτατον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]winnowed, πυρὸς κ. ἄδολος [Refs 2nd c.BC+], etc.; of metals, etc., σίδηρος [Refs 5th c.AD+], etc.; ἀρωμάτων, καθαρῶν, λαχάνων, uncertain meaning in [Refs 4th c.AD+]; ἄκρατος καὶ κ. νοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of feelings, unmixed, μῖσος τῆς ἀλλοτρίας φύσεως [Refs 6th c.BC+]; serene, φρήν [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καθαρός

katharos

of uncertain affinity; clean (literally or figuratively):--clean,

clear, pure.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καθαρός, ά, όν

Adj

clean, pure, unstained

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καθαρός katharos 27x

clean, pure, unsoiled, Mt. 23:26; 27:59; met. clean from guilt, guiltless, innocent, Acts 18:6; 20:26; sincere, upright, virtuous, void of evil, Mt. 5:8; Jn. 15:3; clean ceremonially and morally, Lk. 11:41

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καθαρός κα^θα^ρός, clear of dirt, clean, spotless, unsoiled, Od., Hdt., Eur.

clear, open, free, ἐν καθαρῷ (sc. τόπῳ) in a clear, open space, Il.; ἐν καθαρῷ βῆναι to leave the way clear, Soph.; διὰ καθαροῦ ῥέειν, of a river whose course is clear and open, Hdt.; τὸ ἐμποδὼν ἐγεγόνεε καθαρόν the hindrance was cleared away, id. Hdt.:—c. gen., γλῶσσα καθαρὴ τῶν σημηΐων clear of the marks, id. Hdt.

in moral sense, clear from shame or pollution, pure, καθαρῷ θανάτῳ Od.: esp. clear of guilt or defilement, clean, pure, Theogn., Aesch.; καθαρὸς χεῖρας Hdt.:—so, of persons purified after pollution, ἱκέτης προσῆλθες κ. Aesch.; of things, βωμοί, θύματα, δόμοι, μέλαθρα id. Aesch., Eur.:—c. gen. clear of or from a charge, κ. ἐγκλημάτων, ἀδικίας, κακῶν, etc., Horace's sceleris purus…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
54%pure
pure54% · 15×clean32% · 9×clear7% · 2×innocent4% · 1×purity4% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate54%adverbial27%object12%subject8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 26 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ὁράωI see, look uponοὐχίIrg
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἤδηnow, alreadyκεφαλήthe head
Article the
μακάριοςhappy, blessedκαθαρόςclean, pure, uns
ἐκ
ἀγάπηloveκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
πίστιςfaith, belief, tπρόγονοςan ancestor
καθαρόςpure26×
what comes after →
Article the
καρδίαthe heart, innerκαθαρόςclean, pure, unsδέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
ἀλλάbut, exceptδιάἀπό
ἀλλάbut, except
κακόςbad, evilμιαίνωI stain, pollute
καρδίαthe heart, inner lif
καίand, even, also,
συνείδησιςthe conscience
ὡςas, like as, how

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαθαρός · 26× in the New Testament
Revelation John Matthew Titus 1 Timothy 2 Timothy Acts Hebrews James Luke Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 128 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 31c. AD 40

καὶ ἔστιν ὑπερουράνιος ἀστήρ, πηγὴ τῶν αἰσθητῶν ἀστέρων, ἣν οὐκ ἂν ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καλέσειεν ἄν τις παναύγειαν, ἀφ’ ἧς ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι πλάνητές τε καὶ ἀπλανεῖς ἀρύτονται, καθ’ ὅσον ἑκάστῳ δύναμις, τὰ πρέποντα φέγγη, τῆς ἀμιγοῦς καὶ καθαρᾶς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.15c. AD 75–95

ἤδη τοίνυν τοὺς ἐντευξομένους τοῖς βιβλίοις παρακαλῶ τὴν γνώμην θεῷ προσανέχειν καὶ δοκιμάζειν τὸν ἡμέτερον νομοθέτην, εἰ τήν τε φύσιν ἀξίως αὐτοῦ κατενόησε καὶ τῇ δυνάμει πρεπούσας ἀεὶ τὰς πράξεις ἀνατέθεικε πάσης καθαρὸν τὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ φυλάξας…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 15.1c. AD 100

Ἔτι οὖν καὶ περὶ τοῦ σαββάτου γέγραπται ἐν τοῖς δέκα λόγοις, ἐν οἷς ἐλάλησεν ἐν τῷ ὄρει Σινᾶ πρὸς Μωϋσῆν κατὰ πρόσωπον: Καὶ ἁγιάσατε τὸ σάββατον κυρίου χερσὶν καθαραῖς καὶ καρδίᾳ καθαρᾷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 28Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)109 BC

r … πυρὸν νέον καθαρὸν ἄδολον μέτρωι ὧι καὶ παρείληφεν καὶ ἀποκαθεστάμενον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν

P.Grenf. 2 29Pathyris103 BC

δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι Παήρι ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν λ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους νέον καθαρὸν καὶ ἄδολον ἀπὸ παντός, καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τοῖς

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ δεδανεισμένος Ὥρωι ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους καθαρὸν ἀπὸ παντὸς καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασι μέτρῳ ᾧ καὶ

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
καὶ and G2532
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
λαμπρὸνlampros bright G2986 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Describing something as shining or radiant, like a bright star in Revelation 22 or splendid clothing in Luke 23. It represents magnificent appearance or beauty.
Amplified meaning
shining, radiant
Tyndale gloss
shining
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λαμπρός is an adjective meaning bright, brilliant, or splendid, derived from the verb λάμπω. It describes things that shine or are radiant, including clothing and celestial bodies. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as Revelation 22:1, 22:16, and James 2:2, where it conveys a sense of magnificence or clarity.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** λαμπρός, -ά, -όν

(< λάμπω),

[in LXX: To 13:11, Wi 6:12 17:20, Si 29:22 33:13 (30:25) 34 (31):23, Ep. Je 60*;]

bright, brilliant: ποταμός, Re 22:1 (ΕV, clear); ἀστήρ, Re 22:16; of clothing, brilliant, splendid: Lk 23:11, Ac 10:30, Ja 2:2, 3, Re 15:6 18:14 19:8.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λαμπρός, -d, -dv, (λάμπω) ; a. shining; brilliant: ἀστήρ, Rev. xxii. 16 (Hom. Il. 4, 77, ete.) ; clear, transparent, Rev. xxii. 1. b. splendid, magnificent, [A. V. gorgeous, bright (see below) ]: ἐσθής, Lk. xxiii. 11; Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2 sq.; λίνον [L Tr WH λίθον], Rev. xv. 6; Biaowos, xix. 8; neut. plur. splendid [(R. V. sumptuous) | things, i. e. elegancies or luxuries in dress and style, Rev. xviii. 14. The word is sometimes used of brilliant and glistening whiteness (hence λαμπρὰ τήβεννα, toga candida, Polyb. 10, 4,8; 10,5, 1); accordingly the Vuls. in Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. xv. 6 renders it by candidus; and some interpreters, following the Vulg. (“indutum veste alba”), understand ‘white apparel’ to be spoken of in Lk. xxiii. 11 [A. V. gorgeous; (see above) ]; cf. Keim iii. p. 380 note [Eng. trans. vi. 104].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λαμπρός BGU IIL. 717! (dowry—A.D. 149) κάτοπτ[ρ]ον δίπτυχον, λαμπάδα, P Oxy XII. 14491* (return of temple property— A.D. 213-217) λαμπάδ(ες) apy(vpat) καλαί. For the noun = “torch” in connexion with a torch-race cf. OGZS 764% αἱ. (ii/B.c.), Adichel 8845 (B.c. 164-3), 89317 (i/B.c.). MGr λαμπάδα, ‘‘lamp,’’ ‘‘candlestick.”’

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λαμπρός (lampros) — shining.

λαμπρός, ά, όν,

feminine -ή in Epic dialect [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— bright, radiant, of the sun and stars, λ. φάος ἠελίοιο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; -ότατος, of Sirius, [Refs]; λαμπρὰ σελήνη Hes.[same places],[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of metallic bodies, λ. φάλοι, κόρυθες, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: neuter as adverb, θώρηκες λαμπρὸν γανόωντες [Refs]

2. of white cloths and the like, bright, λαμπρὸς δ᾽ ἦν ἠέλιος ὥς [ὁ χιτών] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λ. ἐσθής, = Latin toga candida, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

3. of water, clear, limpid, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of air, λ. ἠήρ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. of sound or voice, clear, distinct, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to φ. ἀσαφής, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λαμπρός

lampros

from the same as 2985; radiant; by analogy, limpid; figuratively,

magnificent or sumptuous (in appearance):--bright, clear, gay, goodly,

gorgeous, white.

see GREEK for 2985

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λαμπρός, ά, όν

Adj

shining, magnificent, bright

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λαμπρός lampros 9x

bright, resplendent, shining, Rev. 22:16; clear, transparent, Rev. 22:1; white, glistening, Acts 10:30; Rev. 15:6; Rev. 19:8; of a bright color, gaudy, Lk. 23:11; by impl. splendid, magnificent, sumptuous, Jas. 2:2, 3; Rev. 18:14*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λαμπρός λαμπρός, ή, όν λάμπω bright, brilliant, radiant, of the sun and stars, the eyes, etc., Il., attic

of white objects, bright, Od., Hdt.

of water, bright, limpid, Aesch., etc.; of the air, Eur.

of the voice, clear, sonorous, distinct, Lat. clarus, Dem.; so, λαμπρὰ κηρύσσειν Eur.

metaph. of vigorous action, λ. ἄνεμος a fresh keen wind, Hdt.; λ. καὶ μέγας καθιείς swooping down like a fresh and mighty breeze, Ar.; λαμπρὸς φανήσεται he will come vigorously forth, Eur.:—so adv., λαμπρῶς vigorously, Thuc.

metaph. also, clear, manifest, decisive, Aesch., Thuc.: —so adv., λαμπρῶς κοὐδὲν αἰνικτηρίως Aesch.; λελυμένων λ. τῶν σπονδῶν Thuc.; λαμπρῶς ἐλέγετο it was said without concealment, id. Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
44%bright
bright44% · 4×splendid33% · 3×splendid things11% · 1×clear11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object44%subject33%adverbial11%predicate11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐσθήςclothing, raiment
ἐνπεριβάλλωI cast around, c
Article the
ἐσθήςclothing, raimenκαίand, even, also,ἀστήρa star
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
λίνονflax, linen
βύσσινοςof fine linen, cotto
περιβάλλωI cast around, c
ζωήlife
ὕδωρwater
λαμπρόςbright
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
λέγωI say, speakπεριζώννυμιI gird round
ἀναπέμπωI send up to a highe
αὐτός
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
δέbut, on the othe
ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose, am
ἀπό
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλαμπρός · 9× in the New Testament
Revelation James Acts Luke
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.35c. AD 40

ἐὰν δὲ ἀνατείλῃ ὁ ἥλιος, τουτέστιν ὁ φαινόμενος λαμπρὸς νοῦς ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ δόξῃ πάντα διορᾶν καὶ πάντα βραβεύειν καὶ μηδὲν ἐκφεύγειν ἑαυτόν, ἔνοχός ἐστιν, ἀνταποθανεῖται τοῦ ἐμψύχου δόγματος ὃ ἀνεῖλε, καθ’ ὃ μόνος αἴτιός ἐστιν ὁ θεός, εὑρισκόμενος…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.143c. AD 75–95

διαφέρει δʼ οὐδὲν ἢ μὴ περιιδεῖν ἀπολλυμένους ὑπʼ ἐνδείας τῶν ἀναγκαίων, ἢ μὴ κολάσαι δόξαντας ἁμαρτεῖν καὶ περὶ τὴν εὐεργεσίαν τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ λαμπρὰν γενομένην φθονηθέντας, ἡ δʼ αὐτὴ χάρις ἄλλῳ μέντοι τρόπῳ διδομένη·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.2.4c. AD 140

καὶ ἐπάρασα ῥάβδον τινὰ λαμπρὰν λέγει μοι: Βλέπεις μέγα πρᾶγμα;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Mil.Vogl. 3 194 aTebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 146–AD 147

Ἀχιλλίδι οἰκία καὶ αὐλὴ καὶ τῇ Ἡραεῖδι ἕκτον μέρος οἰκίας καὶ αὐλὴ καὶ δοῦλος Λάμπρος ὡς ἐτῶν ε πάντα ἐν τῇ κώμῃ. Ἡραεῖς μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ υἱοῦ Κρονίωνος ἐπιδέδωκα

ZPE 173 (2010), p. 175-189OxyrhynchosAD 282–AD 283

Αὐρηλίου Πρόβου Γοθικοῦ Μεγίστου Περσικοῦ Μεγίστου Γερμανικοῦ Μεγίστου Εὐσεβοῦς Εὐτυχοῦς Σεβαστοῦ … ἐν τῇ λαμπρᾷ καὶ λαμπροτάτῃ Ὀξυρυγχιτῶν πόλει ἐπὶ Αὐρηλίου Ἀγαθείνου τοῦ καὶ Ὡριγένους ἀσχολουμένου ὠνὴν ἀγορανομείου καὶ

P. Thead. 17Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 331–AD 332

ἵνα δυνηθῶμεν διὰ ταύτης τῆς παραμυθίας στῆναι ἐν τῇ κώμῃ καὶ διὰ παντὸς τῇ λαμπρᾷ σου τύχῃ χάριτας ὁμολογήσομεν. διευτύχει. Αὐρήλιοι Σακαῶν καὶ Ἥρων καὶ Καναοῦγ ἐπιδεδώκαμεν. Αὐρήλιος Μαξέντιος

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
περιεζωσμένοιperizōnnumi having girded themselves with G4024 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To gird or fasten a belt around oneself, like in Luke 12:35 and Revelation 1:13. It can be literal or figurative, and is used to describe preparing oneself for action or service.
Amplified meaning
fastened, bound
Tyndale gloss
to gird
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word περιζώννυμι (i.e., *perizōnnumi*) means to gird or fasten around oneself, often in preparation for action. It appears in various forms, including passive and middle voice, and is used in the New Testament to describe actions like girding oneself for service (e.g., Lk 12:37). The term is built from the prefix περί (around) and the root ζώννυμι (to gird).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περι-ζώννυμι and -ύω

(v. Veitch, s.v.)

[in LXX chiefly for חגר, also for אזר, etc.;]

to gird (c. dupl. acc., as ὁ περιζωννύων με δύναμιν, Ps 17 (18):32): pass., αἱ ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι, Lk 12:35; π. ζώνην χρυσῆν, Re 1:13 15:6 (but v. infr.). Mid., to gird oneself: Lk 12:37 17:8 (and so perh. Re 1:13 15:6 supr., cf. I Ki 2:4); c. acc. rei (fig.), τ. ὀσφύν, Eph 6:14 (seq. ἐν, cf. I Ch 15:27).†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περιζώννυμι, “gird round,” is found in the pass., as in Rev 113} TG 1Π' the magic charm P Lond 461%? (iv/A.D.) (=I. p. 70) ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ χάρις τοῦ αἰῶνος ὄνομά μοι καρδία περιεζωσμένη ὄφιν : cf. Diod. Sic. 1. 72. 2 περιεζωσμένοι. For the subst. περίζωμα, “girdle,” cf. P Par 101 (B.c. 145) περὶ τὸ σῶμα χλαμύδα καὶ περίζωμα, and P Oxy VI. 921° (iii/A.D.) περίζωμα a, ‘one girdle,” in an inventory of property.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περιζώννυμι (perizōnnumi) — to gird.

περι-ζώννυμι,

gird upon a person, π. τὸ ξίφος [τινί] [Refs 1st c.AD+]; gird, τὸ παιδίον probably in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—more frequently in middle with perfect passive, gird oneself with, ᾤαν λουτρίδα Theopomp. Comedy texts [Refs]; ἐσθῆτα, τήβεννον, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; γυμνὸς ὢν τοῦτον τὸν ἄνδρα περιεζώσατο put him on as a defence, παρ᾽ ὑπόνοιαν for ἐπίτροπον ἐποιήσατο, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περιεζῶσθαι τὴν φορβειάν to have their halter girded round them. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of a cook, περιεζωσμένος with his apron on, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of athletes, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of a dancer, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

περιζώννυμι

perizonnumi

from 4012 and 2224; to gird all around, i.e. (middle voice or passive)

to fasten on one's belt (literally or figuratively):--gird (about,

self).

see GREEK for 4012

see GREEK for 2224

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περιζώννυμι

v.

I gird round

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περιζώννυμι perizōnnymi 6x

also spelled περιζωννύω, to bind around with a girdle, gird; in NT mid. to gird one’s self in preparation for bodily motion and exertion, Lk. 12:37; 17:8; to wear a girdle, Rev. 1:13; 15:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-NPM — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
17%having girded
having girded17% · 1×having girded himself about17% · 1×having girded themselves with17% · 1×girded17% · 1×he will gird himself17% · 1×having girded yourself about17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb67%predicate17%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
δειπνέωI dineποδήρηςa long robeλαμπρόςshining, magnifi
ὀσφῦςthe loins
Article the
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύ
οὖνtherefore, then
ἵστημιI cause to stand
περιζώννυμιhaving girded themselves with
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἀνακλίνωI make to reclin
διακονέωI wait at table, ser
ἐγώ
Article the
ὀσφῦςthe loins
πρός
Article the
περί
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπεριζώννυμι · 6× in the New Testament
Luke Revelation Ephesians
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 14.425c. AD 75–95

ὡς δὲ καθιμήθησαν αἱ λάρνακες, ἐτόλμα δʼ οὐδεὶς προσελθεῖν τοῖς ἐπὶ τῶν στομίων, ἀλλʼ ὑπὸ δέους ἠρέμουν, μάχαιράν τις περιζωσάμενος τῶν ὁπλοφόρων καὶ ταῖν χεροῖν ἀμφοτέραιν δραξάμενος ἁλύσεως, ἀφʼ ἧς ἤρτητο ἡ λάρναξ, κατῄει ἐπὶ τὰ στόμια δυσχεράνας…

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 25.4.2c. AD 140

ἰδὼν δέ με περιεζωσμένον καὶ ἕτοιμον ὄντα τοῦ διακονεῖν αὐτῷ, Κάλει, φησί, τοὺς ἄνδρας, ὧν εἰσὶν αἱ ῥάβδοι πεφυτευμέναι, κατὰ τὸ τάγμα, ὥς τις ἔδωκε τὰς ῥάβδους.

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
περὶperi around G4012 Preposition
333× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for about or around, used in various contexts such as place, cause, or time. It is often translated as 'about' or 'concerning' in the KJV, and appears in many passages, including Matthew 2:8 and John 16:26.
Tyndale gloss
about
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

One of the workhorse prepositions, standing 333 times. With the genitive it means about, concerning, with reference to. There is no hidden depth here, and it would be a mistake to look for one: its usefulness is that it marks the subject a sentence is circling. In this verse it points at what the earlier accounts were about.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περί, prep. c. gen., acc. (in cl. also c. dat.; cf. M, Pr., 105f.),

with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides).

C. gen.,

of place, about (poët.).

Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mt 2:8, Mk 1:44, Lk 4:38, Jo 16:26, Ac 28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, c. gen., the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mk 5:27, Ac 1:3 28:15, Eph 6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, I Co 7:1, al.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περί, (akin to πέρα. πέραν ; [Curtius § 359]), prep., joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class. Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. circum, circa; around, about. I. with the GeniTIve it denotes that around which an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, ete., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) [ef. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking, teaching, writing, ete., see under ἀναγγέλλω, ἀπαγγέλλω, ἀπολογοῦμαι, γογγύζω, γράφω, Sydow, διαβεβαιοῦμαι, διαγνωρίζω, διαλέγομαι, διδάσκω. διηγοῦμαι (Heb. xi. 32), διήγησις, εἶπον and προεῖπον, ἐπερωτάω and ἐρωτάω, κατηχέω, λαλέω, λέγω, λόγον αἰτέω. λόγον ἀποδίδωμι, λόγον δίδωμι, μαρτυρέω, μνεία, μνημονεύω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περί τροπὴν δέδωκα, “1 have entrusted to him the care of the whole matter” (Edd.), 7. XII. 15831! (ii/A.D.) γράψον μοι περὶ τῶν ὄντων, ‘ write me revarding the present state of affairs,” and ΒΟῸΣ II. 63218 (ii/a.p.) (= ZAZ, p. 173) ο[ὐ]χ ὀκνῶ σοι γράψαι περὶ THs] σωτηρίας pov καὶ τῶν ἐμῶν, “T am not delaying to write you regarding the health of me and mine.” In P Par 488 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski Zp.” p- 91) ἀκούσαντες... τὰ περὶ σου συνβεβηκότα, we have a mixture of ἀκούσαντες περὶ σοῦ and ἀκούσαντες τά (σοι) συνβεβηκότα ΠΕερί, ‘‘ with regard to,” at the beginning of a new clause (as in 1 Cor 71) may be illustrated from the headings in the Mysteries inscr, from Andania Sy// 653 (=*736)} (B.c. 91) περὶ ἱε]ρῶν Kal ἱερᾶν, α΄. See also P Eleph 134! (B.c, 223-2) περὶ δὲ τῶν εἴκοσι δραχμῶν οὔπω ἐκεκόμιστο Φίλων . περὶ δὲ τοῦ οἰναρίου ΤΙραξιάδης οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ, BGU IV. 1097° (time of…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περί (peri) — about.

περί,

Thess., Delph. περ [Refs 5th c.BC+], also Aeolic dialect, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+] V; Elean παρ [Refs]: preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative:—round about, all round (properly different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Sanskrit pári 'round about'.)

__A WITH GENITIVE,

__A.I of Place, sometimes in Poets, round about, around, τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς [Refs 8th c.BC+], on both sides, see at {περιβαίνω} [Refs]

__A.I.2 about near, π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα [Refs]

__A.II to denote the object about or for which one does something:

__A.II.1 with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περί

peri

from the base of 4008; properly, through (all over), i.e. around;

figuratively with respect to; used in various applications, of place,

cause or time (with the genitive case denoting the subject or occasion

or superlative point; with the accusative case the locality, circuit,

matter, circumstance or general period):--(there-)about, above,

against, at, on behalf of, X and his company, which concern, (as)

concerning, for, X how it will go with, ((there-, where-)) of, on,

over, pertaining (to), for sake, X (e-)state, (as) touching,

(where-)by (in), with. In comparative, it retains substantially the

same meaning of circuit (around), excess (beyond), or completeness

(through).

see GREEK for 4008

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περί

Prep.

about, concerning, around

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περί peri 333x

pr. of place, (1) gen., about, around; about, concerning, respecting, Mt. 2:8; 11:10; 22:31; Jn. 8:18; Rom. 8:3, et al. freq.; (2) acc., of place, about, around, round about, Mt. 3:4; Mk. 3:34; Lk. 13:8; οἱ περί τινα, the companions of a person, Lk. 22:49; a person and his companions, Acts 13:13; simply a person, Jn. 11:19; τὰ περί τινα, the condition, circumstances of any one, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περί around, round about with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radical sense, round about, all round, whereas ἀμφί properly means on both sides.

WITH GENITIVE:

of Place, round about, around, Lat. circum, Od.

about, near, ἑσδόμεναι περὶ σεῖο Mosch.

Causal, to denote the object about or for which one does something:

with Verbs of fighting or contending, μάχεσθαι περὶ πτόλιος Il.; περὶ Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος id. Il.; so, τρέχειν περὶ ἑωυτοῦ, περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς Hdt.

about, for, on account of, μερμηρίζειν περί τινος Il.; φροντίζειν περί τινος Hdt.

with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, about, concerning, Lat. circa, de, περὶ νόστου ἄκουσα Od., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%concerning
concerning59% · 199×about16% · 55×for13% · 45×around6% · 19×of3% · 9×other renderings3% · 9×

336 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object8%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 333 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,ἀκούωI hear, listen
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakλαλέωI speak, sayἐρωτάωI ask, question,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἁμαρτίαa sinἀλλάbut, except
μαρτυρέωI witness, testify
Article theἐγώἵναin order that, s
σύ
μέλειit is a care, itγράφωI writeΦαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
περίaround333×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusβασιλείαkingship, sovereτράχηλοςthe neck
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becοὐαίindcl
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ἵναin order that, sArticle the
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becἀδελφόςa brotherArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ὅςArticle theοὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπερί · 333× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Hebrews Mark 1 Corinthians 1 John 1 Thessalonians Romans 1 Peter Jude

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 297 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

περιέχει γὰρ τὸν νοητὸν κόσμον ἐξαίρετον, ὡς ὁ περὶ αὐτῆς λόγος μηνύει.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

νδ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀδύνατος ὄμμασι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι περὶ Πάθυριν γῆν ἤπειρον σιτοφόρον ἀρουρῶν … ἧς γείτονες νότουπλατεῖαὁδός, βορρᾶ … περίχωμα … προπεπρα

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
τὰho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APN — Article · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
στήθηstēthos chests G4738 Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The chest or breast is the front of the body, like when Jesus had his side pierced in John 21:10 or when the apostle John leaned on Jesus' chest in John 13:25.
Amplified meaning
breasts, the front of the body
Tyndale gloss
chest
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word στῆθος (i.e., *stethos*) means 'breast' or 'chest.' It is used in both literal and metaphorical contexts, often representing the seat of feelings or emotions. The New Testament references include instances of physical proximity, such as resting on someone's chest, and expressions of penitence. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

στῆθος, -ους, τό

[in LXX: Ex 28:23, 26 (29, 30) (לֵב), etc. ;]

the breast: Jo 13:25 21:10, Re 15:6; as a sign of penitence, τύπτειν (εἰς) τὸ σ., Lk 18:13 23:48,†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

στῆθος, -ovs, τό, (fr. tornut; that which stands out, is prominent [Etym. Magn. 727, 19 διότι ἕστηκεν ἀσάλευτον), tr. Ilom. down, the breast: Jn. xiii. 25; xxi. 20, (cf. κόλπος, 1) ; Rev. xv. 6. τὸ στῆθος, of mourners (see κύπτω), Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 48.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

στῆθος, “breast ’’: P Magd 247 (B.c. 218) ὥστε καὶ ἀπογυμνωθῆναί pov τὸ στῆθος, P Tebt 11. 31619 (a.p. 99) οὐλὴ στήθ μέσῳ, and BGU II. 4697 (a.p. 159-160) ἐν τᾷ στήθι καυτή[ρ]ιον. In P Masp III. 671694? (Byz.) στήθους ἐπιστ[άν]τος, the word appears to mean a small ‘‘hillock” of sand (cited by Preisigke Worterd. s.v.). MGr στήθι (ἀστήθι).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

στῆθος (stēthos) — chest.

στῆθος, εος, τό,

breast, of both sexes, being the front part of the θώραξ, divided into two μαστοί [Refs 8th c.BC+] in post-Homeric verse; found once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σ. φάσσης ἑψημένης [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: as the seat of the voice and breath, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently as the seat of the heart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; chest, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ σ. breasts of a woman, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. metaphorically, the breast as the seat of feeling and thought, as we use heart, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+], but always in plural, θυμὸν ἐνὶ στήθεσσιν ὄρινε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔχει κότον.. ἐν σ. ἑοῖσι[Refs 8th c.BC+]

III. ={στέρνον} [Refs]breastbone, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

στῆθος

stethos

from 2476 (as standing prominently); the (entire external) bosom, i.e.

chest:--breast.

see GREEK for 2476

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

στῆθος, ους, τό

n.n.

the breast

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

στῆθος stēthos 5x

the breast, chest, Lk. 18:13; 23:48; Jn. 13:25; 21:20; Rev. 15:6*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

στῆθος στῆθος, ος, εος, τό, the breast, Lat. pectus, Hom., Xen.

metaph. the breast as the seat of feeling, the heart, Hom. (always in pl.), Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Thompson Chain Reference topics
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%breast
breast40% · 2×chests20% · 1×breasts20% · 1×bosom20% · 1×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial60%object40%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
τύπτωI beat, strike, ἐπίπερί
στῆθοςchests
what comes after →
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὑποστρέφωI turn back, return
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesus
ζώνηa girdle, belt, purs
χρυσοῦςgolden

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceστῆθος · 5× in the New Testament
John Luke Revelation
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.68c. AD 40

ἑρμηνευθὲν γὰρ τὸ Γηὼν ὄνομά ἐστι στῆθος ἢ κερατίζων·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.154c. AD 75–95

ὃν ἐπιζώννυνται κατὰ στῆθος ὀλίγον τῆς μασχάλης ὑπεράνω τὴν ζώνην περιάγοντες πλατεῖαν μὲν ὡς εἰς τέσσαρας δακτύλους, διακένως δʼ ὑφασμένην ὥστε λεβηρίδα δοκεῖν ὄφεως·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC
P.Köln 6 272Arsinoites (?)251 BC–202 BC

μητέρα μου. οὐκ ἐνακουούσης δʼ αὐτῆς ἀποβάς ἐλάκτισεν αὐτὴν καὶ ἔτυπτεν πυγμαῖς εἰς τὸ στῆθος ὥστε καὶ αἷμα αὐτὴν ἀναγαγεῖν καὶ πεσοῦσαν παραχρῆμα τελευτῆσαι. ἀξιῶ οὖν σὲ ἀναζητήσαντα τὸν

P. Lille Gr. 2 24Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites)219 BC

τῆς ἀναβολῆς τοῦ ἱματίου οὗ περιεβεβλήμην ἔρηξε καὶ ἐπάρασσεν ὥστε καὶ ἀπογυμνωθῆναί μου τὸ στῆθος, καὶ ἐνέπτυσεν εἰς τὸ πρόσωπόν μου παρόντων τινῶν οὓς ἐγὼ ἐπεμαρτυράμην. ἃ δʼ ἐγκαλῶ

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
ζώναςzōnē sashes G2223 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
8× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means a belt or girdle, like the one Jesus wore in Matthew 3:4. It was also used to carry money, as seen in Matthew 10:9. A belt was a necessary part of daily life.
Amplified meaning
belts, girdles
Tyndale gloss
belt/sash/girdle
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ζώνη (zōnē) means a belt or girdle, typically worn around the waist. It can also refer to a purse, as it often served as a receptacle for money. The term appears in several New Testament verses, including Matthew 3:4 and Revelation 1:13. The lexicons note its use in both male and female contexts, with some references to its role in childbirth and as a symbol in various phrases.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ζώνη, -ης, ἡ

(ζώννυμι)

[in LXX for אַבְנֵט, חֲגוֹרָה, etc.;]

a belt, girdle: Mt 3:4, Mk 1:6, Ac 21:11, Re 1:13 15:6; as a receptacle for money, Mt 10:9, Mk 6:8.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ζώνη, -ns, ἡ, (Cavvupe), [fr. Hom. down], a girdle, belt, serving not only to gird on flowing garments, Mt. iii. 4; Mk.i.6; Acts xxi. 11; Rev. i. 13; xv. 6; but also, since it was hollow, to carry money in [A. V. purse]: Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8; Plut. mor. p. 665 b. quaest. conviv. iv. 2, 3, 2; “argentum in zonis habentes,” Liv. 33, 29. [B. D. 8. v. Girdle. ]

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ζώνη (zōnē) — belt/sash/girdle.

ζών-η, ἡ,

(ζώννυμι) belt, girdle:

I. properly the lower girdle worn by women just above the hips, περὶ δὲ ζώνην βάλετ᾽ ἰξυῖ [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Phrases:

I.1. λῦσε δὲ παρθενίην ζ. unloosed her maiden girdle, of the bridegroom, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, of the bride, μούνῳ ἑνὶ ζώναν ἀνέρι λυσαμένα [Refs], absolutely, of marriage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of sexual intercourse, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

I.1. b ζ. λῦσαι to loose the girdle for childbirth, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; later λύσασθαι or ἀπολύσασθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.1. c of men on a march, ζ. λύσασθαι to slacken one's belt, i.e. rest oneself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ζώνη

zone

probably akin to the base of 2218; a belt; by implication, a

pocket:--girdle, purse.

see GREEK for 2218

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ζώνη, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

a girdle, belt, purse

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ζώνη zōnē 8x

a zone, belt, girdle, Mt. 3:4; 10:9; Mk. 1:6; 6:8; Acts 21:11; Rev. 1:13; 15:6*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ζώνη ζώνη, ἡ, ζώννυμι a belt, girdle:

properly the lower girdle worn by women above the hips, (the upper-girdle, the στρόφιον, being worn under the breasts), Hom.

Phrases, λῦσε δὲ παρθενίην ζώνην unloosed her maiden girdle, of the bridegroom, Od.; Mid. of the bride, Anth.:—of men on a march, ζ. λύεσθαι to slacken one's belt, i. e. rest oneself, Hdt.:— of pregnant women, φέρειν ὑπὸ ζώνης, τρέφειν ἐντὸς ζώνης Aesch., Eur.:— εἰς ζώνην δεδόσθαι to be given for girdle-money (as we should say, pin-money), of Oriental queens who had cities given them, Xen.

the man's belt (in Hom. commonly ζωστήρ), Il., Xen., etc.

the part round which the girdle past, the waist, loin, Il.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
63%belt
belt63% · 5×a sash13% · 1×sashes13% · 1×belts13% · 1×

8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object63%adverbial25%subject13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςαἴρωI raise, lift upεἰμίI am, exist
καίand, even, also, nam
κάμηλοςa camel
μαστόςa breast, pap
Article the
στῆθοςthe breast
Article the
ζώνηsashes
what comes after →
δερμάτινοςmade of hide, leathe
περί
χρυσοῦςgolden
σύ
χαλκόςcopper, brass, money
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaul

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceζώνη · 8× in the New Testament
Acts Matthew Mark Revelation
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 15 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.171c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ αὕτη βραχύτατον οὖσα μέρος τὰς τῶν ὄντων ὁρᾷ ζώνας ὅλας καὶ θάλατταν ἄπειρον καὶ ἀέρος μέγεθος καὶ τοῦ παντὸς οὐρανοῦ ὅσον ἀνατέλλων καὶ δυόμενος ὁ ἥλιος ὁρίζει, οὕτως καὶ ὁ θεοῦ λόγος ὀξυδερκέστατός ἐστιν, ὡς πάντα ἐφορᾶν εἶναι ἱκανός, * * *…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.154c. AD 75–95

ὃν ἐπιζώννυνται κατὰ στῆθος ὀλίγον τῆς μασχάλης ὑπεράνω τὴν ζώνην περιάγοντες πλατεῖαν μὲν ὡς εἰς τέσσαρας δακτύλους, διακένως δʼ ὑφασμένην ὥστε λεβηρίδα δοκεῖν ὄφεως·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD undated
P.Louvre 1 1Soknopaiu Nesos (ArsinoitesAD 13

μοι πληγὰς πλείους καὶ κατέαξεν κράνωι τὴν ἀριστερὰν χεῖρα καὶ ἀπηνέγκατό μου χιτῶνα καὶ ζώνην καὶ ἄμην καὶ ἀξείνην, καὶ ἀπʼ ἐκείνου μέχρι τοῦ νῦν κατακλινὴς ἐγενόμην· καὶ βλάβος

P.Ryl. 2 127Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 29

ιη, ξύλινον πυξίδιν ἐν ᾧ ἀργυρίου δραχμαὶ δ, ποτήρια κασσιτέρινα β, ἄμη, πέλυξ, σκαφεῖον, ζώνη ἐν ᾗ κέρματος δραχμαὶ δ, λήκυθος ἐν ᾗ ἐλαίου χοὸς 𐅵, μάκτρα ὀψοποιητική, σφυρὶς

P.Ryl. 2 141Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 37

ἀναιδευόμενοι μὴ ἀποδοῦναι, καὶ ἀπώλεσα ἃς εἶχον ἀπὸ τιμῆς ὀπίου ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς μ καὶ ζώνην . διὸ ἀξιῶ ἀντιλήμψεως τυχεῖν ἵνα μηδὲν τῶν δημοσίων διαπέσῃ. εὐτύχει.

And came forth the seven angels those having the seven plagues out of the temple who were having clothed themselves in linen pure and bright and having girded themselves with around the chests sashes golden.
χρυσᾶς.chruseos golden. G5552 Adjective · accusative · plural · feminine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Golden describes something made of gold, like the golden items in Revelation 1:12-13. This word is used to describe things that are valuable and precious, often in a literal sense. It can also describe something that is overlaid with gold.
Amplified meaning
valuable, precious
Tyndale gloss
golden
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word χρυσοῦς (i.e. *chruseos*) means 'golden' or 'made of gold.' It appears in various contexts, often describing objects adorned with gold, such as in 2 Timothy 2:20 and Hebrews 9:4. The term is derived from χρυσός (gold) and is used in the New Testament primarily in the Book of Revelation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χρύσεος, -εα, -εον (-οῦς, -ῆ, -οῦν; on acc sing. fem., -ᾶν, Re 1:13 and gen. pl. uncontr., -εων, Re 2:1, LTr., v. M, Pr., 48 and cf. Thackeray, Gr., x, 172 f.)

(< χρυσός),

[in LXX chiefly for זָהָב ;]

golden, i.e. made or overlaid with gold: II Ti 2:20, He 9:4, Re 1:12, 13, 20 2:1 4:4 5:8 8:3 9:13, 20 14:14 15:6, 7 17:4 21:15.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χρύσεος, -έα, -eov, contr. -ovs, -7, -ovv, [but acc. sing. fem. -σᾶν, Rev. 1. 131, Τ Tr WH; gen. plur. -σέων, Rev. ii. 1 L Tr; (on its inflection cf. B. 26 (23); Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 207; L. and S. s. v. init.)], (χρυσός), fr. Hom. down, golden; made of gold; also overlaid or covered with gold: 2 Tim. ii. 20; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. i. 12 sq. 20; ii. 1; iv.4; v.8; viii. 3; ix. 7 Grsb., 18, 20; xiv. 143; xv. 6 sq-; xvii. 4; xxi. 15.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χρύσεος (for contracted form in LXX, see Thackeray Gr. i. Ρ. 172f., and in NT, see /ro/eg. p. 48), “made of gold,” “golden”: P Ryl II. 124%° (i/A.D.) ἐνώδιον χρυσοῦν, ‘6a golden ear-ring,” 26. 125!7 (A.D. 28-9) μηνίσκο(ν) χρυσο(ῦν), “a golden crescent,” BGU II. 42319 (ii/a.D.) (= Selectéons, p- 91) ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς, ΚΕ] received my travelling money from Caesar, three gold pieces.” For the form χρύσεος in late Greek, see the reff. in Glaser De ratione, p. 22, and cf. Radermacher G7.?, p. 58.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χρύσεος (chruseos) — golden.

χρύσεος, η, ον,

also ος, ον in [Refs 1st c.BC+], Attic dialect contraction χρυσοῦς, ῆ, οῦν [Refs]; Epic dialect χρύσειος, η, ον: [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Lyric poetry used χρύσεος, α, ον, and this form sometimes occurs in Trag. dialogue and even in Prose, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect χρύσιος [Refs 7th c.BC+] (but χρύσεα [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect χρούσιος [Refs 4th c.BC+]: (χρυσός):—golden, frequently in Epic dialect, especially of what belonged to gods, χρυσέῳ ἐν δαπέδῳ, χρυσέοις δεπάεσσι, χρύσειον ἐπὶ θρόνον, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χ. τάλαντα the golden scales of Zeus, [Refs]; ζώνη χ., of Calypso and Circe, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμος [Refs 7th c.BC+] [prev. cited]; of possessions of mortals, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: sometimes enriched or adorned with gold, χ. σκῆπτρον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κλῖναι, κρητῆρες, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἕστηκε..…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

χρυσοῦς

chruseos

from 5557; made of gold:--of gold, golden.

see GREEK for 5557

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χρυσοῦς, ῆ, οῦν

Adj

golden

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χρυσοῦς chrysous 18x

golden, made of or adorned with gold, 2 Tim. 2:20; Heb. 9:4; Rev. 1:12, 13, 20; 9:13, 20, 21:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χρύσεος χρύσεος, η, ον χρυσός golden, of gold, decked or inlaid with gold, Hom., etc.: sometimes, = ἐπίχρυσος, gilded, gilt, Hdt.; cf. ἵστημι A. III.

χρύσεια μέταλλα gold mines, Thu.; v. χρυσεῖον II.

gold-coloured, golden-yellow, Il.

metaph. golden, χρυσέη Ἀφροδίτη Hom.; χρ. ὑγίεια Pind.; χρ. ἐλπίς Soph.; the first age of man was the golden, Hes.

χρυ_σέη, χρυ_σέην, χρυ_σέου, χρυ_σέῳ etc., in Hom. must be pronounced as disyll.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-APF — Adjective · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-APF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%golden
golden100% · 18×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object61%subject17%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
λυχνίαa lamp-standθυσιαστήριονan altarεἴδωλονan idol, false g
ζώνηa girdle, belt, purs
μαστόςa breast, papστῆθοςthe breast
στέφανοςa crown, garland
αὐτός
φιάληa shallow and flat b
καίand, even, also,ἑπτάIndec
σκεῦοςa vessel to contain
μόνοςalone, but, only
χρυσοῦςgolden.18×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀργυροῦςmade of silverδίδωμιI offer, giveArticle the
Article the
ἐνώπιονbefore the face ἑπτάIndec
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
θυμιατήριονaltar of incenseArticle the
γέμωI am full of
θυμίαμαincenseArticle the
ἐν
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχρυσοῦς · 18× in the New Testament
Revelation Hebrews 2 Timothy
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 111 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.51c. AD 40

„οὐ ποιήσετε μετ’ ἐμοῦ θεοὺς ἀργυροῦς, καὶ θεοὺς χρυσοῦς οὐ ποιήσετε ὑμῖν ἑαυτοῖς“ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.144c. AD 75–95

Κατὰ πρόσωπον δὲ τῆς τραπέζης τῷ πρὸς μεσημβρίαν τετραμμένῳ τοίχῳ πλησίον ἵσταται λυχνία ἐκ χρυσοῦ κεχωνευμένη διάκενος σταθμὸν ἔχουσα μνᾶς ἑκατόν·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 4.1.10c. AD 140

εἶχεν δὲ τὸ θηρίον ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς χρώματα τέσσαρα: μέλαν, εἶτα πυροειδὲς καὶ αἱματῶδες, εἶτα χρυσοῦν, εἶτα λευκόν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. AD
P.Fam.Tebt. 21Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 122

ἡμέρας παρευρέσει μηδεμίᾳ, ἡ δὲ μήτηρ Διδύμη προσομολογεῖ αὐτόθεν ἀποκεχαρίσθαι τῇ θυγατρὶ Διδυμαρίῳ ἐνωτίων χρυσῶν ἀληθινοπίνων ζεῦγος τεταρτῶν τεσσάρων καὶ στολὴν πορφυρᾶν μονοχίτωνα ἅπερ ἅπαντα παρειληφέναι τὴν Διδυμάριον καὶ

JEA 10 (1924), p. 134-Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 206

τῶν ἡμερῶν κριθῆς ἀρτάβας δ καὶ ἄρτων ζεύγη κ, ὅσαδὲ ἐὰν κατενέγκητε ἰμάτια ἢ χρυσᾶ κόσμια, ταῦτα σῶα παραφυλάξομεν, παρεξόμεθα δὲ ὑμῖν κατερχομένοις ὄνους δύο καὶ ἀνερχομένοις τοὺς ἴσους.

πεπληρώμεθα παρὰ σοῦ ὑπὲρ σίτου … … επι … … τετάρτου μέτρῳ Ἀθηναίῳ καὶ χρυσοῦ νομίσματα τέσσαρα … καὶ πρὸς σὴν ἀσφάλειαν ἐξεδώκαμεν σοι τήνδε τὴν πληρωτικὴν ἀποχὴν

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate